Home

DSM250 User`s Manual

Contents

1. Edit Alert Operating Mode Disable Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 302 Deleting an Alert This brings up the list of Alerts managed by the DSM250 Alert Setup Delete Alert Prionty Enab Type Description Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Anchor Watch Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Lat on Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 D 4 1 2 Figure 303 Deleting Alert List Scroll up and down using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons until the alert that must be deleted is highlighted and press the Enter button Revision 1 6 2 Page 257 DSM250 User s Manual A confirmation message is displayed Alert Setup Delete Alert Priority Enab Type Description Are you sure you want to delete selected alert Yes Global Alarm Power Cancel Figure 304 Deleting an Alert Confirmation Press the Accept button to delete the Alert or the Cancel button to return to the previous screen without deleting the Alert 8 5 Editing an Alert From the Alert Setup Menu select the menu item Edit Alert Alert Setup Add New Alert Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode Disable Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 305 Editing an Alert Page 258 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron This brings up the list of Alerts managed by the DSM250 Alert
2. 6 23 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The SMS100 SMS Text Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 12 which can be turned on or turned off by the display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the display to show the following screen Figure 173 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW D3 Haretron 5114100 129902 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 127301 Dina Switch Bank Figure 173 SMS100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the various messages or set the frequency of transmission of the messages by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate which is once every 15 seconds and each time the value changes e 1s 15s The status message will be transmitted at the period specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 23 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the SMS100 device to their factory default states 6 23 2 Label A label may be assigned to a channel as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the function or location of the device See Sectio
3. Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN de Changing tank capacity will affect Ta tank level readings Are you sure Press lt Cancel gt to cancel change Press lt Accept gt to accept change Tz Power Cancel Accept Figure 214 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Screen 6 26 4 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the TLM100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know the geometry of the tank There are two methods of calibrating the tank level sender e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks also most accurate in any case but requires more effort Revision 1 6 2 Page 191 DSM250 User s Manual e Rectangular Tank By inputting some dimensions of a rectangular tank the TLM100 is able to interpolate the volume of liquid from the distance to the surface 6 26 4 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current fluid level The TLM100 will measure the distance to the surface at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the fluid levels to the volume in the tank Figure 197 below shows a screenshot of the DSM250 with the Custom Calibration option highlighted Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks To perform custom calibration of th
4. NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 2756 Fluid Level Off BOY Actual Pressure On Figure 105 FPM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen Page 116 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 14 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 14 2 Channel 0 5 This submenu contains configuration parameters for each of the six channels These menus look different depending on whether the channel s Function has been set to Tank or Pressure Vacuum 6 14 2 1 Channel 0 5 Tank This section describes the channel configuration menu when the channel s Function has been set to Tank mode The Channel 0 5 Tank Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 2 Maretron FPH 1 150999 10 10 1 Channel A Function Tank EAH AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at 4mA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5
5. Rolling Road Display 224 PIQUE 201 LE GEM edo 224 Figure 262 SMS Status Re E E 225 Figure 263 TIME NAM DIS EE 225 Figure 264 Time NNM SS RE EE 226 left VDR Status DNA aar 226 FIQure 266 V16a Mer DE EE 227 FOUTE 267 NINA OSC DISDIAY EE 228 Figure 268 Moon Phase Display 228 Figure 269 SMS Signal Strength Bar Display ooccccoccccccccnccncnnocononoconononanononarononannnonnnnnonacnnnnos 229 OTIS 229 Figure 271 SVING Meter DISDIAY arisin 230 AE TN 230 Figure 273 Watermaker Status Display 2 cc cccesecccceeeecevecncecesscaeecsceeeseceeccsteseesceuecscesestsseeccseesseees 231 Figure 274 Configuration of Switch Breaker Display 231 Figure 275 Selection of an Individual Gwtch Dreaker 232 Figure 276 Configuration of an Individual Switch Breaker rrrnnrennnnrnnnnernnnernnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnen 232 Figure 277 Favorite Screen Showing Highlighted Switch Breaker cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenaees 234 FOU 278 ag BI EE 235 Figure 279 AlGM SAUS SChEC EE 236 Figure 280 Cancelling an Alert from the Alert Status Gcreen 236 Figure 261 The Alert Detall STEN EE 237 Figure 282 AINA NE NN av 237 Figure 283 Part of the Alert Edit Screen ic ii a a EENS 238 Figure 284 gt math Alert EE 240 Figure 285 Trigger Configuration High Alert 241 Page xvi Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 286 LOW Fen IP EE OE 242 Figure 287 Trigger Configuration
6. displays current Speed over Ground relative to the earth not the water Time To Go displays the estimated Time to Go until arrival at the waypoint VMG to Waypoint displays the Velocity Made Good that is the speed at which the distance to the waypoint is decreasing Waypoint Number this displays the number of the destination waypoint Revision 1 6 2 Page 19 DSM250 User s Manual 4 2 20 Pressure Vacuum Altimeter displays the current altimeter pressure reading Barometric displays the current atmospheric barometric pressure Compressed Air displays the current pressure of compressed air Engine Boost displays the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Engine Coolant displays the coolant pressure for an engine Engine Fuel displays the fuel pressure for an engine Engine Oil displays the oil pressure for an engine Filter displays the current pressure at a fuel filter Fuel displays the current fuel pressure Hydraulic Oil displays hydraulic oil pressure Oil displays the current oil pressure Steam displays steam pressure Transmission Oil displays oil pressure for an transmission User Defined 129 User Defined 144 displays pressure from a pressure sensor of a user defined type Water displays water pressure 4 2 21 Rudder The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to four rudders Rudder Angle amp Order displays the angle of the vessel s rudder
7. followed by the data value moves the selection to the editable value and changes the keys to edit mode 3 3 2 Choosing a Value from a List When editing a value chosen from a list the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Back Key 3 aborts the edit and restores the editable value to its previous value Scroll Up Key Y changes the currently selected editable value from the presently selected one to the one immediately above it in the list of possibilities If the top menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the bottom menu item Scroll Down Key changes the currently selected editable value from the presently selected one to the one immediately below it in the list of possibilities If the bottom menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the top menu item Enter Key Accepts the currently displayed value and stores it 3 3 3 Entering a Numeric Value When editing a numeric value the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Cancel Key aborts the edit and restores the editable value to its previous value Increase Key increases the editable value Decrease Key UY decreases the editable value Accept Key EY Accepts the currently displayed value and stores it 3 3 4 En
8. 5 2 7 16 Resistance This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of resistance Units that may be selected include the following e Ohms e Kilohms 5 2 7 17 Motion Distance This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of distance Units that may be selected include the following mm cm Meters Inches Feet 5 2 7 18 Motion Velocity This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of velocity Units that may be selected include the following Meters Second Inches Second Feet Second km Hour miles hour Knots 5 2 7 19 Motion Velocity This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of velocity Units that may be selected include the following Page 46 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Meters Second Inches Second Feet Second km Hour miles hour Knots 5 2 7 20 Motion Acceleration This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of acceleration Units that may be selected include the following e Meters Second e G e Feet Second 5 2 7 21 Angular Velocity This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of angular velocity Units that may be selected include the following Degrees Second Degrees Minute Radians Second Radians Minute RPM 5 2 7 22 Angular Acceleration This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of angular acceleration Units
9. Low Alert 243 Figure 288 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert 244 Figure 289 Trigger Configuration On Alert 245 Figure 290 Trigger Configuration Off Alert 246 Figure 291 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert 247 EP ENN 248 Figure 293 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert 248 Figure 294 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert 249 Figure 295 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert 251 Figure 296 DIFECHON Alert TE ETC 252 Figure 297 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert 252 Figure 298 Alert Editor Time Alert 253 Figure 299 Remote Annunciator Enable Disable n0nnaannannnennnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnsnernnnneresnrrsrrenrennne 254 HE G00 AS Se ENN 255 Figure 301 SMS Text Phone Number X Gcreen 255 Fe 302 NAN ve 257 Figure 303 Deleting Alert ist 257 Figure 304 Deleting an Alert Confirmation occcccccnnccccnnncccnnccnnnncnnnnnononnnonnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnns 258 Ed Edling an FSI dE 258 Figure 306 Editing an Alert Alert ist 259 Figure 307 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode occcccoccccccoccncccccnocononocononononononacnnonannnonannnnnnnnnnnns 260 Figure 308 Editing the SMS 164 Phone BOOK iscsccccsscedccvecendcecoseeicccesandcadeseuieacoseensetesexacavesceeseciacs 261 Figure 309 SMS Text Phone Book Gcreen sanamen aeaa Narr Nai 261 Fe 10 PENN TEN O eaae 262
10. displays the rotational speed of the engine Tilt Trim displays the tilt or trim of the drive Voltage displays the electrical power supply voltage measured at the engine Fuel Economy Dis Vol displays the current fuel economy for the engine Fuel Consumption Vol Dis displays the current fuel consumption for the engine Percent Load displays the current load on the engine as a percentage of rated load Percent Torque displays the current torque from the engine as a percentage of rated torque Revision 1 6 2 Page 15 DSM250 User s Manual Trip Fuel Used displays the total amount of fuel consumed by that engine on the present trip fuel flow transducers that are capable of being reset via the 126208 NMEA 2000 command of the Trip Fuel Used field of the 127497 Trip Parameters Engine message such as the Maretron FFM100 may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Warning displays warning conditions generated by the engine 4 2 10 Environment Barometric displays the current atmospheric barometric pressure Heat Index displays the current heat index based on air temperature and humidity Humidity Inside displays the relative humidity from an indoor humidity sensor Humidity Outside displays the relative humidity for an outdoor humidity sensor Moon Phase displays the phase of the moon at the current time and position Sunrise displays the local time of
11. Disable this option appears between the values 0 0 E and 0 1 W when scrolling through the values When manual variation is disabled the SSC200 SSC300 will not Page 176 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron transmit any variation information and heading information will be available only in magnetic heading format WARNING Magnetic variation changes as your location on the earth changes therefore magnetic variation should be adjusted with changes in position Neither the DSM250 nor the SSC200 SSC300 will make these changes automatically they are the responsibility of the user Revision 1 6 2 Page 177 DSM250 User s Manual 6 25Maretron TLA100 Configuration Maretron TLA100 tank level adapters on the network may be configured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron TLA100 firmware version 1 6 15 The TLA100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 192 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration abel At Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 Power Figure 192 TLA100 Configuration Screen 6 25 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not nee
12. Figure 31 DSM250 Units Menu 5 2 7 1 Heading This menu item allows you to select whether heading course and bearing information is displayed in true or magnetic measurements True heading can only be displayed if a variation is available on the NMEA 2000 bus If the DSM250 is not showing heading or COG i e no needle on compass rose or dashes for digital displays it s probably a good indication that variation isn t available on the network The DSM250 can t calculate true heading given magnetic heading from a compass if variation isn t available Likewise the DSM250 can t calculate magnetic course given true course from a GPS if variation isn t available You can setup a favorite screen to display variation which will help you determine whether or not you have a product on the network broadcasting variation information Maretron s GPS s use the World Magnetic Model to broadcast variation 5 2 7 2 Depth This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all depth related information Units that may be selected are the following e Meters e Fathoms e Feet Revision 1 6 2 Page 43 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 3 Distance This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all distance related information Units that may be selected are the following e Nautical Miles e km e Statute Miles 5 2 7 4 Boat Speed This menu item allows you to select the units to be used
13. Maretron DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Color Graphic Display User s Manual Revision 1 6 2 Copyright 2015 Maretron LLP All Rights Reserved Maretron LLP 9014 N 23 Ave 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 7850 http www maretron com Maretron Manual Part M001301 Revision 1 6 2 Page DSM250 User s Manual Revision History Original document Added sections on Alert and Anchor Watch and configuration of more devices 1 4 8 Added prohibition of red Loctite threadlocking compound and cleaning agents containing acetone Added new J2K100 configuration capabilities Added new ACM100 configuration capabilities Added information on configuring IPG100 Added information on configuring GPS200 Added new DST110 configuration capabilities 1 4 16 Added description of Electrical Distribution control and monitoring Added Fluid Flow category Added Switch Breaker display type Added Engine gt Trip Fuel Used parameter Added Vessel Data Recorder monitoring 4 Added Airmar transducer configuration calibration Added DCR100 configuration 1 4 Added FFM100 configuration Added FPM100 configuration Added NBE100 configuration Added VDR100 configuration Updated Supported Display Types in Technical Specifications 16a Corrected Page Number Issue Updated Received PGN List Corrected Description of DSM250 Running in Favorite Screens Mode Figure Added notes that zero re trigger time on an alert will disable re triggering
14. Revision 1 6 2 Page 157 DSM250 User s Manual 6 21 Maretron RIM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron RIM100 firmware version 1 1 1 The DSM250 may be used to configure the channels on the Run Indicator Module RIM100 After selecting the RIM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW D4 Maretron HIM 100 HINT 10 111 Device Label engine room Instance 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel gt Channel A Figure 163 RIM100 Configuration Screen 6 21 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HUT SWe D4 Haretron RIM 400 HAL 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance o Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 164 RIM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 21 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Page 158 Revision 1 6 2 Maretro
15. displays an angle transmitted by an angle sensor e g mast rotation angle Angular Velocity displays angular velocity Angular Acceleration displays angular acceleration Distance displays a linear distance Rotational Rate displays rotational rate e g shaft soeed Velocity displays linear velocity 4 2 19 Navigation The DSM250 is not a primary navigation device that is it does not provide means for entering and storing waypoint and route data The DSM250 can receive information on the current leg of the voyage from a primary navigation device such as a chart plotter or PC with navigation software and NMEA 2000 interface and display this information Bearing Orig to Dest displays the direction from the origin waypoint to the destination waypoint Bearing To Waypoint displays the bearing to the destination waypoint Course Over Ground displays the current Course over Ground always referenced to true north Cross Track Error displays the cross track error minimum distance from the boat to the programmed route Distance To Waypoint displays the distance to the destination waypoint Est Time of Arrival displays the Estimated Time of Arrival at the waypoint Lat Lon displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Rolling Road displays navigation information for the current leg of the route Set Drift displays the direction set and speed drift of the water current Speed Over Ground
16. unless you have multiple units on the network Page 200 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 30 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 30 1 3 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 30 2 Remote Device Selection The Maretron NMEA 2000 to NMEA 0183 gateway USB100 can be configured to select which NMEA 2000 devices are selected for display on the computer attached to the USB interface of the USB100 In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration The USB100 Device Selection Menu for an example network configuration can be seen in Figure 229 WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HUT SW 56 Maretron USB 100 1156054 10 182 Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SM Stat Disp TI Maretron TLM 100 100082 On On A3 Maretron DSM250 12006 Onl On B2 Maretron DCM 10 100046 Onl On B4 Maretron DCM 100 MED Onl On 49 Maretron SSC200 120224 Onl On C5 Mare
17. Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SV 14 Maretron DER 100 1710000 20 1113 Advanced Configuration DEST TAR HELM RELAY BOX Instance i Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel A Figure 59 DCR100 Configuration Screen 6 7 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 18 Maretron DCR 100 1110009 20 1113 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Up Figure 60 DCR100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 7 1 1 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration The DCR100 contains Hall effect current sensors In order to ensure maximum accuracy you should perform this calibration step while there is no current flowing through the current sensors Move the highlight bar to the Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration and press the Enter button The following confirmation screen will be displayed Page 76 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal You are about to zero out all 6 channels current sensors If you do not want to do this press lt Cancel gt Otherwise press l
18. Figure 181 SSC200 SSC300 Installation Offset Calibration Screen Use the Increase and Decrease Ed keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known heading to which the boat is pointed Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform installation offset calibration at this time press the Abort key and the installation offset will not be altered 6 24 3 Inverted Installation Entry Normally the SSC200 SSC300 is mounted so that the label on the compass is facing up and the NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183 connectors are facing towards the bow of the vessel A recent version of SSC200 SSC300 firmware supports mounting the compass upside down for instance to a ceiling or backwards with connectors facing towards the stern of the vessel so that the S50200 55C300 can be mounted to the aft side of a bulkhead If either of these mounting options is used the DSM250 can be used to inform the SSC200 SSC300 of this fact so that it can adjust heading rate or turn pitch and roll readings to be corrected accordingly Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation LIED MEN Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Sou
19. Figure 311 Editing the Name of a Phone Book Ent 262 Figure 312 SMS Phone Book Test Message opup 263 Figure 313 Advanced CGonfguraton 263 Figure 314 Restore Factory Defaults Confirmation rrnravnnnnnvnnnnrvvnnnrnnnnnvnvnnrenrnnnennnnrennnrrennnnnennnn 264 Figure 315 Surface Mounting Template nnnannnennnnannnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnrrnennrnrrnrnrrnnrrnnrrrenrrsnrrrenrennni 273 FIGU S TO FT TCO e E 274 Revision 1 6 2 Page xvii Maretron 1 General 1 1 Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the Maretron DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Color Graphic Display Maretron has designed and built your display to the highest standards for years of dependable and accurate service Maretron s DSM250 is a high resolution color display that allows easy interpretation of NMEA 20009 instrument and navigation data through custom display configurations with an easy to use five key illuminated keypad The Maretron DSM250 is designed to operate within the harsh demands of the marine environment However no piece of marine electronic equipment can function properly unless installed configured and maintained in the correct manner Please read carefully and follow these instructions for installation configuration and usage of the Maretron DSM250 in order to ensure optimal performance 1 2 Firmware Revision This manual corresponds to DSM250 firmware revision 1 4 18 1 3 DSM250 Features The Maretro
20. OctoPlex AC Box or DC Box or other NMEA 2000 load controller which uses NMEA Command of the 127501 Binary Switch Bank Status PGN for control The display may be set up in several different configurations Single Indicator Light this creates a single switch breaker 2 rows this creates four rows of single switches breakers 3 rows this creates three rows of single switches breakers 4 rows this creates four rows of single switches breakers 2 rows 2 columns this creates two rows by two columns of a single switch breaker Figure 274 below shows a Favorite Screens Setup screen with a single window configured with the 4 rows configuration Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 16 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Elec Distribution Switch Breaker BETH A rows Figure 274 Configuration of Switch Breaker Display Revision 1 6 2 Page 231 DSM250 User s Manual The maximum number of switches breakers you can have on a single screen is 16 the 4 Quarters format with all four windows set to use the 4 rows or 2 rows 2 column switch breaker configurations In order to configure the individual switch breaker controls press the Enter key with the selected type highlighted to display a menu with entries for each switch breaker in the window being configured as shown in Figure 275 below Favorite Screens Setup weu LIGH
21. Parameter Value Comment NMEA 20000 DeviceNet Micro C Industry Standard Waterproof Connector Display Technology Active Matrix TFT LCD Sunlight Readable Display Resolution 320 x 240 Pixels QVGA Resolution Display Viewable Area 117mm W x 88mm H 5 7 Diagonal Display Backlighting LED 13 User Programmed Levels 0 100 Keyboard 5 Silicone Rubber Keys Multi Colored LED Backlighting Languages Supported English Dutch User Selectable Nederlands Certifications Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment amp IEC 61162 3 systems Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment amp Tested to IEC 60945 systems FCC and CE Mark Electromagnetic Compatibility Supported Display Data Types Average Frequency Average L N Voltage Average L L Voltage Phase A Frequency Phase A L N Voltage Phase AB L L Voltage Phase B Frequency Phase B L N Voltage Phase BC L L Voltage Phase C Frequency Phase C L N Voltage Phase CA L L Voltage Anchor Watch DC Current Voltage Battery Temperature Battery State of Charge Battery Time Remaining Ripple Voltage Power Depth Water Depth Water Below Transducer Transducer Offset Resistance S Electrical Resistance Elec Distribution Switch Breaker Breaker Current Hardware OFF Counter Hardware ON Counter Hardware ERROR Counter Hardware ON Timer Hardware OFF Timer Hardware ERROR Timer Engine Monitor Boost Pressure Hours Coolant Pressure Coolant Temp Exhaust Gas
22. The HW column shows the device hardware version The SW column shows the device software version firmware version Revision 1 6 2 Page 51 DSM250 User s Manual 6 1 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducers The DSM250 supports configuration and calibration of the following Airmar Depth Speed Temperature transducers that have NMEA 2000 interfaces e DST800 DT800 P39 P79 B122 51850 ST800 HT200 The following calibration functions are supported not all functions apply to every model of transducer e Reset trip log e Set depth Offset e Perform Speed Calibration e Program Temperature Offset Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HU SW 23 Airmar DST A9 EH H 127 i 1003 10 Clear Speed Calibration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 2 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 33 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducer Configuration Screen 6 1 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Page 52 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 23 Airmar DST 200 PI H 127 i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Device Inst
23. This menu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase Revision 1 6 2 Page 59 DSM250 User s Manual 6 3 1 2 Current Transformer B The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor This menu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase B 6 3 1 3 Current Transformer C The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor This menu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase C 6 3 1 4 Current Transformer A If you notice that the power measurements of phase A are negative when they should be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buitons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 5 Current Transformer B If you notice that the power measurements of phase B are negative when they s
24. e YANMAR select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 3 Boost Pressure Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of boost pressure senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a boost pressure sender you must select the correct type of boost pressure sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no boost pressure sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR W THRESHOLD select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 4 Boost Pressure Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual boost pressure senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the boost pressure sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge 6 12 5 Drive Trim Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of drive trim gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog drive trim gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e No Gauge select this option if there is no trim gauge present e YANMAR
25. keys to select the desired tank number Finally press the Enter key EY to confirm your selection and store the new tank number within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Ei Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 Power Figure 205 Configuring the Tank Number 6 25 6 Tank Type The TLA100 can be used in tanks containing any of a number of different types of fluids So that network connected monitoring devices can determine easily what sort of fluid is in the monitored tank the TLA100 must be programmed to indicate the fluid type it is monitoring Figure 206 below shows a screen shot of the tank type being configured First use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down EY Revision 1 6 2 Page 185 DSM250 User s Manual keys to position the highlighted cursor over Tank Type then press the Enter key EW to move the highlight to the tank type data itself Now use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down B keys to change the tank type data to the type desired Finally press the Enter key to confirm the selection and store the value within the TLA100 Available tank types are as follows Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water There are also a number of reserved tank types to accommodate possible f
26. such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 16 1 3 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The GPS200 transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 122 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW di Maretron DS 200 T 1 45 10 34 Advanced Configuration pa PGN Enable Disa ble dance ell gens Magnetic Variation On Position Rapid Update Un COG and SOG Rapid Update On GNSS Position Data On GNSS DOPs On GNSS Sats in View On Figure 129 GPS200 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling P or through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key EY 6 16 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults The DSM250 is capable of restoring all programmable settings on a Maretron GPS200 to the factory default condition You can choose this setting by pressi
27. that may be selected include the following e Degrees Second e Degrees Minute e Radians Second 5 3 Control Mode Control mode may be entered from the favorite screens mode of the display to perform certain control and reset functions The following functions may be performed in control mode e Switch Breaker may be switched on and off see section 7 25 for details e Anchor Watch Anchor Drop position may be set to the current GPS position see section 7 1 for details e Engine Trip Fuel Used may be reset to zero for fuel flow transducers that are capable of being reset via the 126208 NMEA 2000 command message such as the Maretron FFM100 e Trip Volume may be reset to zero for fluid flow transducers that are capable of being reset via the 126208 NMEA 2000 command message such as the Maretron FFM100 Revision 1 6 2 Page 47 DSM250 User s Manual e Trip Log may be reset to zero for log transducers that are capable of being reset via the NMEA 2000 command message such as the Maretron DST110 may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details For resetting Engine Total Fuel Used Trip Volume or Trip Log use the following procedure to reset the total in the transducer providing the value In normal operating mode use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change to the screen containing the display to be reset Once that screen is displayed fo
28. the speaker internal to the DSM250 will be activated when this Alert is triggered Revision 1 6 2 Page 253 DSM250 User s Manual 8 3 9 Tone If Local Audible is enabled the tone that is sounded on the DSM250 and the Remote Annunciators can be set here This allows the user to configure the Alerts so that the alert can be identified from the tone The values for Tone are Beeps A continuous series of half second on half second off beeps is sounded This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 3 a Continuous A continuous tone is sounded This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 2 General Emergency A series of seven one second on one second off tones are sounded followed by a single tone of 7 seconds on The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 1a 7 pulse General Emergency Alarm SOLAS III 50 111 6 4 Carbon Monoxide This is a series of four one tenth second on one tenth second off beeps followed by one and a half seconds of silence The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for Temporal 4 alarms T4 CO Fire This is a series of three half a second on half a second off beeps followed by one and a half seconds of silence The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for Code 3 ISO 8201 Smoke Fire 8 3 10 Remote Annunciators Selecting the Remote Annunciators option will bring up a list of 16 ALM100 devices If the Annunc
29. to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually programs the offset value into the DST100 such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 10 5 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within a DST100 depth speed temperature transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 83 Pressing the Accept key while the Page 92 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the DST100 s trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value i e you don t have to perform the operation from other display locations Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW OE Maretron DST 100 ID 50825 D235 1 30 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 Speed Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 0 8 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm GT Cancel Accept Figure 83 Resetting the DST100 Trip Distance Log Revision 1 6 2 Page 93 DSM250 User s Manual 6 11 Maretron DST110 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring Maretron s DST110 for several different parameters including trip log resetting
30. 200mA Nominal Supply Low Brightness NMEA 20009 Spec 1LEN 50 mA Reverse Battery Protection es Indefinitely Energy Rated per SAE J1113 Mechanical Parameter Value omment Size 6 875 x 5 75 x 1 75 Including Flanges for Mounting 174 6mm x 146mm x 44 5mm Weight 26 02 7379 E Mounting Surface or Flush Mount Ot Environmental arameter EC 60945 Classification Operating Temperature torage Temperature 40 to 70 Relative Humidity 93 RH 40 C per IEC 60945 8 2 Vibration 2 13 2Hz O 1mm 13 2 100Hz O 7m s per IEC 60945 8 7 Rain and Spray 12 5mm Nozzle 100liters min from 3m for 30min per IEC 60945 8 8 olar Radiation Ultraviolet B A Visible and Infrared per IEC 60945 8 10 orrosion Salt Mist 4 times 7 days 40 C 95 RH after 2 hour Salt Spray Per IEC 60945 8 12 lectromagnetic Emission Conducted and Radiated Emission per IEC 60945 9 lectromagnetic Immunity Conducted Radiated Supply and ESD per IEC 60945 10 Safety Precautions Dangerous Voltage Electromagnetic Radio Frequency per IEC 60945 12 Revision 1 6 2 Page 271 DSM250 User s Manual 12 Technical Support If you require technical support for Maretron products you can reach us in any of the following ways Telephone 1 866 550 9100 Fax 1 602 861 1777 E mail Support maretron com World Wide Web _hitp AWwww maretron com Mail Maretron LLP Attn Technical Support 9014 N 23 Ave Suite 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 USA
31. 6 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 6 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 6 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The DCM100 Annunciator Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGNs 127506 and 127508 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Revision 1 6 2 Page 71 DSM250 User s Manual Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 56 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW B4 Maretron DOCHW0 HS 10 104 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 12756 DC Detailed Status On IMS Battery Status On Figure 56 DCM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options
32. 6 2 Maretron Display Settings Advanced Information Boot Version 0 0 0 Bus Status Device Instance 0x03 3 Hardware Version 2 0 Industry Group Marine 4 Installation Deseription 1 Helm 2 Label Load Equivalency Number 13 650 mA Max Manufacturer Maretron 137 Scroll Up Figure 16 DSM250 Advanced Information Screen Most of the items within the Advanced Information menu are obvious and not described here although a less obvious menu item Bus Status is described below 5 2 4 2 1 Bus Status The DSM250 is capable of monitoring the NMEA 2000 network and displaying certain statistics Baud Rate the speed capability of the connected network given in bits per second bps Voltage the network voltage as measured by the DSM250 in Volts Traffic the percent usage of the total available bandwidth measured by the DSM250 Receive Rate the DSM250 measured received rate in frames per second fps Transmit Rate the DSM250 measured transmit rate in frames per second fps Error Count the DSM250 measured error frames since entering the Bus Status screen Receive Counter the number of DSM250 measured received frames and Transmit Counter the number of DSM250 measured transmitted frames Bus Status Baud Rate 250000 bps Voltage 12 1 Volts CAN Frame Traffic 44 4 Receive Rate 845 fps Transmit Rate 2 tps Error Count 4 Times Receive Counter 0 Frames Transmit C
33. Boost Pres Sender Offset 0 Oil Pres Gauge Type No Gauge Oil Pres Sender Type YANMAR Figure 91 EMS100 Configuration Screen First Screen Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HW SN C1 Maretron EMS 100 1220251 20 Lat Oil Pres Sender Type YANMAR Oil Pres Sender Offset 0 Water Temp Gauge Type No Gauge Water Temp Sender Type YANMAR Water Temp Sender Offset 0 129 reset Engine Hours 10 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 92 EMS100 Configuration Screen Second Screen 6 12 1 Engine Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple engines on the network By convention the Port Engine is given an instance number of 0 and the Starboard Engine an instance number of 1 If there is a third center engine it should be given an instance number of 2 6 12 2 Boost Pressure Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of boost pressure gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog boost pressure gauge you Revision 1 6 2 Page 99 DSM250 User s Manual must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e No Gauge select this option if there is no boost pressure gauge present
34. Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All measured STW readings are multiplied by this number before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 3 This changes the correction factor back to 1 such that all subsequent measured STW readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network Revision 1 6 2 Page 53 DSM250 User s Manual 6 1 6 Speed Calibration The Airmar speed transducer speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the location or placement of the speed transducer within the hull The speed transducer can be corrected for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You calibrate the speed transducer STW by pressing the Enter key with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 81 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 35 Calibrating the Airmar Speed Transducer Speed The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 81 indicates the STW as measured by the Airmar speed transducer which can
35. Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure ERIN TE AY Outside Humidity 13 Percen Outside Temperature 82 F Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 241 Setting the Barometric Pressure Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct pressure and the press the Enter button to store it 6 32 6 Outside Humidity The Humidity is pre calibrated before leaving the factory and should not require adjustment However the current humidity level may be entered in this screen to re calibrate the WSO100 should this be required Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 8A Maretron WSOWO 1200421 20 20 2 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity BERIT Outside Temperature 82 F Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 242 Setting the Outside Humidity Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct humidity and the press the Enter button to store it 6 32 7 Outside Temperature The Temperature sensor is pre calibrated before leaving the factory and should not require adjustment However the current temperature may be entered in this screen to re calibrate the WS0100 should this be required Page 210 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configu
36. DSM250 a Make sure the studs are fully inserted into the back of the DSM250 but don t over tighten the studs Page 2 Revision 1 6 2 6 Maretron b Do not use threadlocking compounds containing methacrylate ester such as Loctite Red 271 as they will cause stress cracking of the plastic enclosure Insert the studs protruding from the back of the DSM250 through the mounting holes and secure with the provided hardware a Place the flat washer on the stud first followed by the lock washer followed by the knurled nut b Hand tighten the knurled nut SE OY Figure 1 Surface Mounting the DSM250 2 3 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 NOTE When flush mounting the DSM250 ensure that the vent port a small hole near the NMEA 2000 cable connector is not covered or blocked Blocking the vent port will compromise the integrity of the seals on the unit and will void the unit s warranty The DSM250 can be flush mounted to any suitable surface as shown in Figure 2 The steps for this type of mounting are as follows 1 Attach the Flush Mount Template see Section 0 to the surface where the DSM250 is to be 3 located a Make sure the template is level by using one of the horizontal lines as a guide b Scotch tape works well for securing the template c The maximum thickness of the mounting material should not exceed 17 using the provided mounting studs thicker surfaces can be accommodated but you wil
37. DSM250 always enters the favorite screens mode In the favorite screens modes the DSM250 displays one of up to sixteen favorite screens Each favorite screen can display one two three or four information displays Each information display can show any displayable data in any display type supported by that data In favorite screens mode the DSM250 can operate in one of two ways Manual mode a particular favorite screen remains on the display until you select another one or Auto mode the DSM250 automatically cycles between favorite screens at time intervals which are individually programmable for each favorite screen An example screen of the DSM250 running in favorite screens mode can be seen in Figure 9 below Engine Coolant Temp Engine Tachometer Figure 9 DSM250 Running in Favorite Screens Mode The very bottom left hand corner of the screen shows two important parameters 1 it indicates which favorite screen is being displayed in this case Favorite 5 and 2 it indicates that the DSM250 is currently operating in the Auto mode Manual would appear in place of Auto if the DSM250 was operating in Manual mode Revision 1 6 2 Page 27 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 Menu Mode The menu mode is entered while viewing favorite screens by pressing the Enter key 9 In menu mode the DSM250 may be configured by scrolling up and down the menu and selecting one of the submenus found there The DSM
38. DSM250 for DST100 Speed through Water The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 81 indicates the STW as measured by the DST100 which can be changed to the actual STW by following these steps First pick a soeed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase EW and Decrease UY keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform installation offset calibration at this time press the Abort key and the speed calibration will not Revision 1 6 2 Page 91 DSM250 User s Manual be altered The speed calibration process provides a method for the actual STW reading produced by the DST100 to be adjusted within the DSM250 e calibration data is not stored within the DST100 WARNING Unlike resetting the trip log and setting the depth offset which actually programs the DST100 so that all displays receive the same information speed calibration must be performed at individual displays in order to show calibrated speed through water 6 10 4 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the t
39. Defined 129 Figure 101 FFM100 Channel 1 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679099 10 1121 Channel 1 Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label STBD FUEL TEMP Fluid Type Fuel Flow Instance 1 Flow Label STED ENG FUEL FLOW Volume Instance 1 MEHR STED ENG FUEL VOLUME Figure 102 FFM100 Channel 1 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 6 13 5 2 1 Sensor You may select whether this channel is connected to a 3 phase sensor Maretron fuel flow sensors with three pulse outputs or a 1 phase sensor other manufacturer s fluid flow sensors with a single pulse output 6 13 5 2 2 Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instance number of the flow rate and total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 Revision 1 6 2 Page 113 DSM250 User s Manual 6 13 5 2 3 Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 13 5 2 4 K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow s
40. Device Configuration H Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 29 Maretron THP 100 H2000 10 111 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Device Label INSIDE BOX Figure 223 TMP100 Configuration Screen 6 29 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model So HW SV 29 Maretron TMP 00 150009 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 224 TMP100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 29 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 6 2 Page 197 DSM250 User s Manual 6 29 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 29 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Th
41. Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW EC Maretron NBE 100 1403 10 10 0 Advanced Configuration HAYE Forward Bus Extender Figure 147 NBE100 Configuration Screen 6 19 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Revision 1 6 2 Page 147 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW BC Maretron NBE 0 12410263 10 10 0 Advanced Configuration Device Instance P Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Figure 148 NBE100 Advanced Configuration Screen 1 1 2 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 1 1 2 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 1 1 2 3 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 20Ma
42. Enable Disable AA TC On Figure 194 TLA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Fluid Level message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The status message will not be transmitted e On The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 25 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 25 2 Label See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 25 3 Tank Capacity In order for the TLA100 to produce readings of the amount of fluid remaining in the tank the tank Capacity must be programmed into the TLA100 adapter Figure 195 below shows a screen shot of the tank capacity being configured Revision 1 6 2 Page 179 DSM250 User s Manual To program the tank capacity use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Tank Capacity menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical tank capacity value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the desired tank capacity value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100
43. OTHER LOSS INCURRED BECAUSE OF INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE IN NO EVENT SHALL MARETRON S AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT S INVOLVED MARETRON SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER THEORIES OF LAW WITH RESPECT TO PRODUCTS SOLD OR SERVICES RENDERED BY MARETRON OR ANY UNDERTAKINGS ACTS OR OMISSIONS RELATING THERETO Maretron does not warrant that the functions contained in any software programs or products will meet purchaser s requirements or that the operation of the software programs or products will be uninterrupted or error free Purchaser assumes responsibility for the selection of the software programs or products to achieve the intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from said programs or products No specifications samples descriptions or illustrations provided Maretron to Purchaser whether directly in trade literature brochures or other documentation shall be construed as warranties of any kind and any failure to conform with such specifications samples descriptions or illustrations shall not constitute any breach of Maretron s limited warranty Revision 1 6 2 Page 275 DSM250 User s Manual Warranty Return Procedure To apply for warranty claims contact Maretron or one of its dealers to describe the problem and determine the appropriate course of action If
44. Page 272 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 13 Installation Template Please check the dimensions before using the following diagram as a template for drilling the mounting holes because the printing process may have distorted the template has Drill S Drill 3 16 Diameter 3 16 Diameter 1 3972 Holes 4 h Holes Cut 2 25 diameter Cut the surface out along the dotted line Drill Drill P 3 16 Diameter 3 16 Diameter N Holes Holes 2 375 2 379 Surface Mounting Template Figure 315 Surface Mounting Template Revision 1 6 2 Page 273 DSM250 User s Manual 5 47 139mm 6 54 166mm Figure 316 Flush Mounting Template Page 274 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 14 Maretron 2 Year Limited Warranty Maretron warrants the DSM250 to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for two 2 years from the date of original purchase If within the applicable period any such products shall be proved to Maretron s satisfaction to fail to meet the above limited warranty such products shall be repaired or replaced at Maretron s option Purchaser s exclusive remedy and Maretron s sole obligation hereunder provided product is returned pursuant to the return requirements below shall be limited to the repair or replacement at Maretron s option of any product not meeting the above limited warranty and which is returned to Maretron or if Maretron is unable to deliver a replacement that
45. Resistance to sender EG Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 161 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance 6 20 7 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the RAA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 162 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Sender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the RAA100 Page 156 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender EE Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 162 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance
46. Restore Factory Defaults Figure 117 GPS100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 15 1 1 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the GPS100 device on the network Unless there are multiple GPSs on the network this should be left at zero 6 15 1 2 GPS Antenna Altitude The DSM250 is capable of setting the antenna altitude on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key 3 with the Antenna Altitude menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 118 to be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW Swe 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude GOD GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 118 Configuring Antenna Altitude on a GPS100 Revision 1 6 2 Page 125 DSM250 User s Manual The allowable values for the Antenna Altitude are between 100m and 100m This number represents the altitude or the GPS100 and is used to improve the quality of the position fix if only a two dimensional fix is obtainable If a three dimensional position fix is obtainable this value is not used 6 15 1 3 Elevation Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the Elevation Mask on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this s
47. Setup Edit Alert Priority Enab Type Description 0 Yes Global Alarm 1 Yes Global Alarm d Yes Global Alarm 3 Yes Global Alarm Anchor Watch 4 Yes Global Alarm 5 Yes Global Alarm 6 Yes Global Alarm 9 Yes Global Alarm Lal on 11 Yes Global Alarm 21 Yes Global Alarm Figure 306 Editing an Alert Alert List The following information is shown for each alert that is in the system Priority The priority of the Alert See 8 3 3 Enab Whether the Alert is Enabled or Disabled Type The Type of Alert This is a combination of whether the Alert is Local or Global 8 3 15 and whether the Alert is an Alarm or a Warning 4 3 1 Description The textual description of the Alert 8 3 5 Scroll up and down using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons until the alert that must be edited is highlighted and press the Enter button The Alert Editor is opened pre populated with the parameters of the chosen Alert See Section 8 1 for details of these parameters 8 6 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode The Vessel Operating Mode must be set on each DSM250 This is a potentially risky operation in that Alerts that are Active in the existing mode may be ignored in the new Operating Mode The DSM250 will warn the operator about these Alerts to minimize the risk However if the new vessel status was transmitted to other Alert Sources that are unmanned then the warnings would be lost For this reason the Vessel Operating mode mu
48. a return is necessary place the product in its original packaging together with proof of purchase and send to an Authorized Maretron Service Location You are responsible for all shipping and insurance charges Maretron will return the replaced or repaired product with all shipping and handling prepaid except for requests requiring expedited shipping i e overnight shipments Failure to follow this warranty return procedure could result in the product s warranty becoming null and void Maretron reserves the right to modify or replace at its sole discretion without prior notification the warranty listed above To obtain a copy of the then current warranty policy please go to the following web page http www maretron com company warranty php Page 276 Revision 1 6 2
49. are e Disable The message will not be transmitted e Default The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate e 1 0s 5 0s The message will be transmitted at the period specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 6 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 6 2 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration The DCM100 is shipped with a Hall effect current sensor In order to match the DCM100 unit and the sensor to one another and ensure maximum accuracy you should perform this calibration step while there is no current flowing through the current sensor Move the highlight bar to the Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration and press the Enter button The following confirmation screen will be displayed Page 72 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal You are about to zero out your current sensor If you do not want to do this press lt Cancel gt Make sure no current is flowing through the current sensor and press lt Begin gt to start calibration Power Cancel Figure 57 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Confirmation Screen Make sure that no current is flowing through the sensor and press Begin to execute the calibration process or Cancel to return to the previous menu When the calibration is complete the following screen will be displayed
50. as indicated by the rudder sensor as well as the angle to which the rudder has been commanded by an autopilot or steering device 4 2 22 SMS Text Status Status displays the status of the Maretron SIM100 SMS Text device Signal Strength displays the signal strength of the cellular network Indicator displays whether the Maretron SIM100 SMS Text device has a connection to the cellular network 4 2 23 Special Device Watermaker displays a screen with several different parameters associated with Sea Recovery watermakers 4 2 24 Speed Speed Through Water displays the speed of the boat relative to the water Speed Over Ground displays Speed over Ground relative to the earth not the water Total Log displays the total distance traveled by the vessel since the log indicator was installed Trip Log displays the distance traveled by the vessel since the trip indication of the log indicator was last reset the trip log value from log transducers that are capable of being reset via the NMEA 2000 command of the Distance Since Last Reset field of the 128275 Distance Log message such as the Maretron DST110 may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Page 20 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 4 2 25 Tank The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to sixteen tanks types 16 fuel plus 16 water etc Capacity displays the fluid capacity of the tank Level displ
51. assembly part number DSMMNTASSBLY includes a bracket and screws for attaching the bracket to the DSM250 a stand and 2 knobs for fastening the DSM250 bracket to the stand Page 4 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 3 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 2 4 Connecting the DSM250 The Maretron DSM250 provides a connection to an NMEA 20009 interface through a connector that can be found on the back of the unit The NMEA 2000 connector is a five pin male connector see Figure 4 You connect the DSM250 to an NMEA 2000 network using a Maretron NMEA 20009 cable or compatible cable by connecting the female end of the cable to the DSM250 note the key on the male connector and keyway on the female connector Be sure the cable is connected securely and that the collar on the cable connector is tightened firmly Connect the other end of the cable male to the NMEA 2000 network in the same manner The DSM250 is designed such that you can plug or unplug it from an NMEA 2000 network while the power to the network is connected or disconnected Please follow recommended practices for installing NMEA 20009 network products Sockets Pins Connector Threads Connector Threads Male Connector Female Connector 1 Shield in 2 NET S power supply positive V 3 NET C power supply common V 4 NET H CAN H 5 NET L CAN L Figure 4 NMEA 2000 Connector Face View 2 4 1 Checking the Connection Once the NMEA 2
52. become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude falls below the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Anchor Alert Similar to the Outside Radius Alert this alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field The Anchor Alert is more suited for smaller radii and can be displayed graphically in the Anchor Watch Display Direction Alert The alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Direction by more than the Offset Wind Direction Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Timer Alert The alert will become active when the time reaches the time specified in the Alarm Time field and thereafter after the intervals specified in the Repeat Interval field Page 26 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 5 Operating Modes The DSM250 has two main operating modes including normal viewing of information in the favorite screens mode Section 5 1 and the menu mode Section 5 2 Also the control mode is a sub mode of the favorite screens mode in which certain control and reset functions may be performed Section 5 2 7 14 5 1 Favorite screens modes After the power up screen see Section 3 1 the
53. button to store it 6 11 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 11 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The DST110 transmits several different NMEA2000 PGN s which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 23 Maretron DET 110 j D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable ETT O 128267 Water Depth On 13 Environmental Parameters On 150311 Environmental Parameters Ott 10312 Temperature Ott 178275 Distance Log On Figure 86 DST110 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The message will not be transmitted e On The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA 20009 rate Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys
54. channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 13 4 2 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 110 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 13 4 2 10 Fluid Type Program this parameter to match the type of fluid whose flow is being monitored 6 13 4 2 11 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 2 12 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 4 2 13 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 2 14 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 5 Channel 1 This
55. configured to become active periodically making them useful for signaling watch changes for example every four hours or as a personnel alarm making sure a crew member is at the helm every 15 minutes When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval of zero is accepted it will be disabled to prevent further triggering When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval greater than zero is accepted it will transition to the Inactive state waiting for the next time it should trigger 8 3 7 12 1 Trigger Configuration Time Alert Alert Detail Data Local Time Instance Any Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Time Alert Repeat Interval 0 01 hh mm Alert Time 4 19 Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Scroll Scroll Bach Up Down Power Enter Figure 298 Alert Editor Time Alert Alert Time The alert will become active at the time specified in this field If the time specified has already passed then the alarm will be set for the next day Entering a number without the colon will assume that the hours are zero Repeat Interval The alert will become active again after the period specified in this field For example if the Alarm Time were set to 8 00 and the Repeat Interval were set to 1 00 1 hour zero minutes the Alarm would become active again at 9 00 10 00 and so on 8 3 8 Local Audible If the Local Audible field is set to Enabled
56. current day and position Twilight PM displays the time of nautical twilight i e the time of day when the sun is 12 degrees below the horizon in the evening for the current day and position Revision 1 6 2 Page 21 DSM250 User s Manual 4 2 28 Transmission The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to four transmissions Gear displays the current gear of the transmission forward neutral or reverse Oil Pressure displays the pressure of the oil in the transmission Oil Temp displays the temperature of the oil in the transmission Warning displays warning indications generated by the transmission 4 2 29 VDR The DSM250 supports display of status of a Vessel Data Recorder Status displays the operating state of the VDR Memory Capacity displays the total memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR Memory Used displays the total amount of memory used on the USB flash drive in the VDR Memory Available displays the total amount of memory remaining on the USB flash drive in the VDR Percent Used displays the percentage of the memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR that is filled with data Percent Available displays the percentage of the memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR that is still available for data storage 4 2 30 Vessel Heave displays heave vessel movement along the vertical axis Keel displays the height of a swing keel Pitch displays the pitch
57. currently at version 1 6 14 The configuration of these devices is identical to version 2 0 1 shown here The GPS100 has several different programmable parameters that are configurable by the DSM250 display Normally it is not necessary to configure the GPS100 although there may be some circumstances where configuration is desirable The following sections describe the different configuration modes including the Restore Factory Defaults configuration which allows you to return the GPS100 to the factory settings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW Swe 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration old st ngine GPS Mode Auto Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Figure 116 GPS100 Configuration Screen Page 124 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 15 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea The Advanced Configuration Screen is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SV JC Maretron GPS W 140027 11 16H Advanced Configuration Device Instance GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable
58. direction The reference direction can be selected from the current direction heading or wind direction or it can be manually entered Figure 296 shows a Direction Alert and associated parameters Revision 1 6 2 Page 251 DSM250 User s Manual Direction Alert Parameters Direction Alert GEE Inactive R transitions to the i 5 o meee wier Active state after Mmmm Active irection moves more than Set Set Delay seconds See Awaiting Cancel HI Angle away from A the Reference y ar A j Direction Alert transitions 7 i to the Awaiting Cancel T i state after Clear Delay oe seconds oc i E stane er S lt UN ba Clea vu per OE AS i Operator Cancels E i Alert lt g Monitored gt 2 Direction moves Clear Delay Q closer than Clear 2 Angle away from lt the Reference Direction Time Figure 296 Direction Alert Parameters 8 3 7 11 1 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type PIC Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Offset Set Point 20 Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Offset Clear Point 15 Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Reference Direction 270 Magnetic Get Current Direction Local Audible Enable Figure 297 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If
59. display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HU SU 11 Maretron DEH0 190015 12 1 15 0AT Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SN Stat Disp ENEE E ATTE On 49 Maretron SSC AN 1437 Onl On H Maretron DEM 190000 Onl On DI Maretron USB 0 160111 Onl On 80 Maretron W501 Mb Onl On Power Figure 67 DSM200 Remote Device Selection Screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 81 DSM250 User s Manual The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the remote DSM200 On or that the remote DSM200 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up Y and Scrol
60. fluid level The TLA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the fluid levels Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks and for non standard values of resistances for tank level senders To perform custom calibration of the tank level sender use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key 3 to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process The first step in custom calibration of the tank level sender is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank Capacity use the arrow keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then press the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Back Key 39 will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Revision 1 6 2 Page 119 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration 1 Use arrow keys to select estimated tank capacity 100 Gal 12 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Figure 109 Tank Levels C
61. for the display of all boat speed related information Units that may be selected are the following Knots Miles Hour Km Hour Meters second 5 2 7 5 Wind Speed This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all wind speed related information Units that may be selected are the following Knots Miles Hour Km Hour Beaufort Meters second 5 2 6 Wind True Vessel Ref This menu items allows you to select whether the true wind direction and speed referenced to the vessel are relative to the water or the ground Sailors are generally interested in measurements relative to the water while power boaters are interested in measurements relative to the ground Station is for home applications i e fixed mounting location unlike a vessel that changes direction Formats that may be selected are the following e Water e Ground e Station 5 2 Temperature This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all temperature related information Units that may be selected are the following e F e C Page 44 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 5 2 8 Atmospheric Pressure This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of atmospheric barometric pressure Units that may be selected are the following Inches Mercury in Hg Bar Millibars Millimeters Mercury mm Hg kPa 5 2 9 Fluid Pressure This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the d
62. higher priority than a warning with priority 0 4 3 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes You can configure alerts to operate in one or more fixed operating modes 1 disabled 2 moored 3 underway or 4 anchored This allows you to easily enable or disable groups of individual alarms Page 24 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron depending on the vessel s operating mode Setting the vessel alert operating mode is described in section 8 6 The Operating Mode is one of Disabled All alerts are disabled This mode should be used when the vessel is in storage dry dock or otherwise out of operation Moored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to a structure that is permanently attached to the ground like a pier wharf dock or mooring buoy Underway This mode is used when the vessel is not moored nor anchored Anchored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to the sea floor with an anchor NOTE The DSM250 will always display global alerts generated by other devices on the network regardless of the Operating Mode selected 4 3 5 Alert States Alerts exist in one of five states Disabled A Disabled Alert is an alarm or warning that has yet to be enabled or activated In this state no action will be taken regardless of the value of the monitored parameter A Disabled Alert May be enabled in which case it transitions to the Inactive state Inactive An Inactive alert is an alarm or warning that has been enab
63. label will describe the equipment to which the ACM100 is connected See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 62 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 3 6 Reset Total Energy Recorded The ACM100 will accumulate the total amount of energy produced by a Generator or a Utility Pressing the Enter key while this item is highlighted will start the process to reset this value to zero The following confirmation screen is displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg Are you sure you want to reset energy recoed 7 Power Cancel Accept Figure 46 Reset Total Energy Recorded Confirmation Screen Press Accept to reset the value or Cancel to return to the previous screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 63 DSM250 User s Manual 6 4 Maretron ALM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron ALM100 firmware version 1 0 5 Configuration Device Configuration HA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 10 5 D Maretron ALM 190 1460041 10 Instance 0 Label Bridge Test Annunciator Figure 47 ALM100 Configuration Screen 6 4 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HWE
64. or Large default e Restore Factory Defaults This restores the indicator light to factory default settings 7 10Numeric Display The numeric display shows the selected parameter in a numeric format on the screen A full screen example of the current depth display can be seen below in Figure 257 Page 220 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 257 Numeric Display Example The upper left hand corner indicates the parameter being displayed and the center of the screen shows the numeric value for the indicated parameter The bottom right hand corner shows the units Revision 1 6 2 Page 221 DSM250 User s Manual 7 11Numeric Precision The numeric precision display shows the selected parameter in a numeric format on the screen but at a higher resolution or precision than the numeric display A full screen example of the current depth display can be seen below in Figure 257 Water Depth Figure 258 Numeric Precision Display Example The upper left hand corner indicates the parameter being displayed and the center of the screen shows the numeric value for the indicated parameter The bottom right hand corner shows the units 7 12Rolling Road The DSM250 supports a Rolling Road or navigation highway display This display repeats transmitted navigation data from a primary navigator such as a chart plotter or a personal computer running navigation software Figure 259 below shows the favorites screen setup menu wit
65. seconds Figure 187 SSC200 SSC300 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Screen 6 24 9 Variation Source Entry The SSC200 SSC300 being a magnetic compass transmits heading information referenced to the magnetic north pole magnetic heading The SSC200 SSC300 is capable of transmitting heading information referenced to the earth s geographic North Pole true heading In order to produce true heading information regarding the magnetic variation at the current location is required Please see Page 174 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron the SSC200 SSC300 User s Manual for more details on the use of magnetic variation by the S5C200 55C300 compass By default the SSC200 SSC300 is capable of receiving variation information on either its NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000 interfaces This causes the SSC200 SSC300 to use variation data from either the NMEA 0183 interface or the NMEA 2000 interface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC 200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source lire Ku Power Figure 188 Setting Variation Source to NMEA
66. select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 6 Drive Trim Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of drive trim senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a drive trim sender you must select the correct type of drive trim sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no drive trim sender present e YANMAR e MERCURY Page 100 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 7 Drive Trim Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual drive trim senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the drive trim sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Valid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading Select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 8 Oil Pressure Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of oil pressure gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog oil pressure gauge you must select the correct
67. shows the selected data in a graphical format resembling an analog gauge There is a general gauge format for most types of display and a specialized rudder gauge display A full screen example of a tachometer display can be seen in Figure 250 below Engine Tachometer Figure 250 Gauge Display Example A full screen example of the rudder gauge display can be seen in Figure 251 below Figure 251 Rudder Angle Gauge Display Example Page 216 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 7 7 GPS Status Display The GPS Status display shows the following data about the selected GPS receiver GPS operating mode 2D 3D DGPS Satellite signal strength up to 12 satellites Satellite azimuth and elevation up to 12 satellites Position HDOP Time Date Accuracy of position An example of a full screen GPS Status display can be seen below in Figure 252 GPS Status 0 DGP5 26 29 298 N 62 00 761 W 15 21 30 Alt 2m 09 44 50 HDOP 54 Aces 182 m Figure 252 GPS Status Display Example Revision 1 6 2 Page 217 DSM250 User s Manual 7 8 Half Gauge Display The Half Gauge display shows the selected parameter value in a graphical format resembling a semicircular analog gauge A full screen example of a half gauge display can be seen in below Tank Fuel Level Figure 253 Half Gauge Display Example 7 9 Indicator Light The DSM250 is capable of displaying the state of binary ON OFF sensors on the network wit
68. sunrise for the current day and position Sunset displays the local time of sunset for the current day and position Dew Point displays the current dew point based on air temperature and humidity Temp Engine Room displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted in an engine room Temp Inside displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted inside the vessel Temp Main Cabin displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted inside the main cabin Temp Outside displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted outside Temp Sea displays the current temperature of the water Twilight AM displays the time of nautical twilight before sunrise for the current day and position Twilight PM displays the time of nautical twilight after sunset for the current day and position Weather displays a screen with a wide variety of weather related data See Section 7 14 for details Wind Chill displays the current wind chill based on air temperature and wind speed 4 2 11 Fluid Flow Flow Rate displays the current rate of flow of a fluid Trip Volume displays the total volume of fluid through the sensor on the present trip fluid flow transducers that are capable of being reset via the NMEA 2000 command of the Trip Volume field of the 65287 Trip Volume Maretron Proprietary message such as the Maretron FFM100 may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Page 16 Revision 1 6 2 Ma
69. the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Offset Set Point Offset Set Delay If the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by more than the Offset Heading Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field the alert will become active Page 252 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Offset Clear Point Offset Clear Delay If the alert is active and the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by less than the Offset Heading Clear Point for longer than the time specified in the Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive Reference Heading Reference Direction Reference Course Enter the desired reference heading or direction into this field If the monitored value differs from this value by more than the Offset Heading Set Point the alert will be triggered Get Current Heading Get Current Direction Get Current Course Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current value of the heading or direction being monitored into the Reference Heading Reference Direction Field 8 3 7 12 Trigger Type is Time Alert The DSM250 can be configured with alerts that go active at a predetermined time such as an alarm clock These alerts can also be
70. the equipment to which the channel is connected see Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 21 4 3 Reset Counter This resets the hardware counter associated with this channel to zero 6 21 4 4 Reset Timer This resets the hardware timer associated with this channel to zero Page 160 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 22Maretron SIM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron SIM100 firmware version 1 1 1 The DSM250 may be used to configure the channels on the Switch Indicator Module SIM100 After selecting the SIM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW DS Maretron SIM NW 129902 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Label P H DC CKTS Instance 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel gt Channel 4 Figure 167 SIM100 Configuration Screen 6 22 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SWe D3 Maretron SIM SW 1120002 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance D Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore F
71. the new rudder number within the RAA100 Page 154 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number Operating Mode NMEA2000 Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Figure 159 RAA100 Setting the Rudder Number 6 20 5 Operating Mode The RAA100 can be operated in one of two operating modes depending on the installation e NMEA 2000 the only thing that is connected to the resistive sender is the RAA100 NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge in addition to the RAA100 the resistive sender is also connected to a dual coil analog gauge It is important that this setting be performed correctly in order for the RAA100 to produce correct angle measurements A screenshot showing configuration of the operating mode appears in Figure 160 below To configure the operating mode use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down B keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Operating Mode menu item then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the operating mode value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the operating mode to the desired value and finally press the Entry key to confirm your selection and store the operating mode within the RAA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model
72. the power key before these three seconds have elapsed the DSM250 will return to its current operational state Page 6 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Speed Over Ground Degrees Figure 6 Powerdown Countdown Screen 3 3 Keypad Essentials The DSM250 has a five key keypad located below the screen Each key has slightly different functions depending on the operating mode Figure 7 below shows the DSM250 keys and their names Power Lights Down Enter Key Key gi Key Key Figure 7 Keypad and Key Names In the normal viewing mode where your favorite screens are displayed the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key EY turns the DSM250 off see section 3 1 on page 6 for details A momentary press of this key can also be used to accept or cancel an Alert see section 8 2 1 on page 236 for details Lights Key a quick press cycles the backlight brightness between three programmed brightness levels see Section 5 2 4 3 on page 34 for details while a long press cycles the DSM250 through 8 programmable color palettes see Section 5 2 4 4 on Page 34 Up Key OP switches the display from the current favorite screen to the next highest numbered favorite screen that is enabled for that particular mode Down Key switches the display from the current favorites screen to the next lowest numbered favorite screen that is enabled for that particu
73. timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the OFF state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ON Timer displays the value of a hardware timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the ON state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ERROR Timer displays the value of a hardware timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the ERROR state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details 4 2 9 Engine The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to 64 engines Boost Pressure displays the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Hours displays the number of hours of operation reported by the engine Coolant Pressure displays the engine s coolant pressure Coolant Temp displays the engine s coolant temperature Exhaust Gas Temp displays the temperature of the engine s exhaust gas Fuel Pressure displays the pressure of the fuel for the engine Fuel Rate displays the rate of fuel consumption for the engine Oil Pressure displays the engine s oil pressure Oil Temp displays the engine s oil temperature Tachometer
74. to anywhere between 0 1 seconds and 5 0 seconds if you desire To do this use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the Wind Data Damping Period menu item then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the numerical value on the right This is shown in Figure 240 below Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the damping period to the desired value and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the WSO100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 8A Maretron WSOWO 1200121 20 207 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period ED Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 80 F Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 240 Setting the Wind Data Damping Period 6 32 5 Barometric Pressure The WSO100 has an internal barometer which is pre calibrated before leaving the factory If the unit requires re calibrating then this field allows the entry of the actual pressure This may be necessary if the vessel is on a lake with an altitude other than sea level and the user wishes to normalize the barometric pressure to sea level Revision 1 6 2 Page 209 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 8A Maretron WSO 1200421 20 20 2 Advanced
75. to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 8 Damping Period V I F If you feel that the monitored Voltage Current and Frequency parameters are changing too quickly or too slowly on the display you can adjust the damping that is applied to the output readings by adjusting this parameter The default damping period is 0 5 seconds You may change it to a value in the range of 0 2 seconds to 10 seconds Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 9 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 3 1 10 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The ACM100 Alternating Current transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For reasons of compatibility with older NMEA2000 devices some of these PGNs are redundant disabling these PGNs will reduce the amount of traffic on the NMEA2000 bus Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 45 Configuration Device C
76. type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are No Gauge select this option if there is no oil pressure gauge present YANMAR YANMAR W THRESHOLD YANMAR VDO YANMAR VDO W THRESHOLD select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 9 Oil Pressure Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of oil pressure senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has an oil pressure sender you must select the correct type of oil pressure sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no oil pressure sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 10 Oil Pressure Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual oil pressure senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the oil pressure sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Valid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading Revision 1 6 2 Page 101 DSM250 User s Manual Select the required option using the Increase and Decreas
77. which results in the screen shown in Figure 83 Pressing the Accept key while the Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the DST110 s trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value i e you don t have to perform the operation from other display locations Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNE HW SW 23 Maretron DST 10 D255 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 6 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm GOETH Power Cancel Accept Figure 90 Resetting the DST110 Trip Distance Log Page 98 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 12Maretron EMS100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron EMS100 firmware version 1 4 1 The EMS100 is configured to match the engine to which it is connected The EMS100 Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HUT SW Li Maretron EMS 10 1220851 20 EN MiEngine Instance dei Drive Trim Gauge Type No Gauge Drive Trim Sender Type YANMAR Drive Trim Sender Offset 0 Boost Pres Gauge Type No Gauge Boost Pres Sender Type YANMAR
78. will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the Low Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds In this example the set point may be described in more than one unit so additional fields have been supplied so that the user can select the units of depth Changing the units of the set point will also change the units of the clear point The initial units displayed in these fields will correspond to those set in the Units Dialog see Section 5 2 7 8 3 7 3 Trigger Type is Data Unavailable Alert The Data Unavailable Alert can be used in conjunction with other alert tyoes when you need to know if a particular parameter is no longer being received on the network or is flagged as not available by the transmitting device For instance you probably would want to use a Data Unavailable Alert for the Depth gt Current Depth parameter since it would be advisable to know if the depth sounder were to stop transmitting a depth reading or became unable to determine the depth due to fouling or some other reason On the other hand if you were to set a Data Unavailable Alert on Engine gt Engine Water Temperature parameter you would then get an alert every time the ignition was switched off and the engine s ECU stopped transmitting data 8 3 7
79. 0 allows configuration of USB100s on network Maretron Vessel Data Recorder VDR100 set device label Maretron Ultrasonic Wind and Weather Station WS0100 set installation offset set wind damping rates and enable disable individual NMEA 20009 PGN transmissions More device types will be included in future firmware releases In each case the contents of the Device Configuration menus may vary depending on the version of the firmware within the device The Device Configuration menu is shown in Figure 32 Page 50 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN Hu SW 21 Maretron GPS 140001 11 14 62 Maretron SSC AM 110002 10 19 03 Maretron DSTIDD 110002 10 10 5 Maretron USE 100 160004 10 16 Maretron DSM200 1100005 12 1 86 Maretron WSO RN 1200006 10 100 B9 Maretron TLAAN 1500 10 10 CO Maretron RAA 100 10 10 DE Lowrance EP 30 SOME 10 10 Enter Power Back Figure 32 Device Configuration Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manufacturer column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another
80. 0 set installation offset perform magnetic deviation calibration check magnetic deviation calibration status invert installation configure magnetic variation settings setup NMEA0183 interface program rate of turn damping zero the rate of turn offset and enable disable individual NMEA 20009 PGN transmissions Maretron Solid Sate Compass SSC300 set installation offset perform magnetic deviation calibration check magnetic deviation calibration status invert installation configure magnetic variation settings setup NMEA0183 interface program rate of turn damping zero the rate of turn offset and enable disable individual NMEA 2000 PGN transmissions Maretron Tank Level Adapter TLA100 set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Shallow TLM100 set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Gasoline TLM150 set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Deep TLM200 set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Temperature Monitor TMP100 set device label and channel instance temperature source type and label Maretron NMEA 2000 to USB gateway USB10
81. 0 00 min sec Alert Clear Point Gal hr Alert Clear Delay 0 00 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Operating Mode Moored Enable Operating Mode Underway Enable Scroll Up Page 242 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 287 Trigger Configuration Low Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the value of the parameter being monitored falls below the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The parameter being monitored must fall below the Low Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the parameter value rises above the value in this field the alert
82. 0 PSI Tank Capacity 1893 Liters Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number e Tank Type Fuel Figure 106 FPM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Tank Mode Revision 1 6 2 Page 117 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 5 Maretron FPH 100 160999 10 10 1 Channel Label AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at 4mA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5 0 PSI Tank Capacity 1893 Liters Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number e Tank Type Fuel Data Damping Period 3 05 Figure 107 FPM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Tank Mode 6 14 2 1 1 Function You can set the channel s Function to Disabled Tank or Pressure Vacuum This section of the manual assumes that the channel s function has been set to Tank 6 14 2 1 2 Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 14 2 1 3 Pressure at 4mA Program this parameter to match the pressure reading of the pressure transducer when it is Sourcing a current of 4mA You can determine this value by examining the specification of the pressure transducer being used 6 14 2 1 4 Pressure at 20mA Program this parameter to match the pressure reading of the pressure transducer when it is sourcing a current of 20mA You can determine this value by examinin
83. 0 below The first step in calibration is to move both trim tabs to the full up position and then press the Accept gt key to begin the calibration process You may also elect to abort the calibration process at this time by pressing the Abort key Trim Tabs Calibration 1 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data 2 Raise both trim tabs to full up position 3 Press lt Accept gt to begin calibration and follow the instruction in the pop up windows Power Accept Figure 40 EP 30 Trim Tabs Calibration Opening Screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 57 DSM250 User s Manual After you press the Accept EY key a screen shown in Figure 41 below appears instructing you to now lower both trim tabs to the full down position It is important that you do this without stopping in order for the calibration process to succeed Trim Tabs Calibration Comms gt d amme EX Lower both trim tabs to full down position without stopping Figure 41 EP 30 Intermediate Calibration Screen After you have lowered both trim tabs to their full down position and a few seconds have elapsed the screen shown in Figure 42 below should appear indicating that the calibration of the trim tab sensors has completed successfully You may now press any key to return to the previous menu Trim Tabs Calibration Di EI 3 Calibration completed successfully Press any key to con
84. 00 CONIU SOS EE EAEE EEN aE AAEN 76 Figure 60 DCR100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 76 Figure 61 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Gcreen 77 Figure 62 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Completion Gcreen 77 Figure 63 DCR100 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 78 Figure 64 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen DCR Mode 79 Figure 65 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen ALM Mode 80 Figure 66 DSM200 Remote Configuration Gcreen 81 Figure 67 DSM200 Remote Device Selection Screen 81 Figure 68 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Configuration Sereen cccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 83 Figure 69 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Gcreen 84 Figure 70 DSM150 DSM250 Copy alarms settings from local display cccccseseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 85 Figure 71 DSM150 DSM250 Copy device selection from local display s sssnsensssenrsnerrsesrrreenenes 85 Figure 72 DSM150 DSM250 Copy display settings from local depla y 86 Figure 73 DSM150 DSM250 Copy favorite settings from local display 000nn0nnnannnnnnennnenennnnnnnnne 86 Figure 74 Favorite Settings Transfer Completion Screen cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeenes 87 Figure 75 DSM150 DSM250 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display ooocoooocoo 87 Figure 76 DSM150 DSM250all settings from local display cooocccccocnccco
85. 000 connection to the Maretron DSM250 has been completed observe the display to check to see that information is being properly received One way to verify connectivity is to enter the device selection menu which is described in Section 5 2 3 2 Refer to Section 0 Troubleshooting if no information appears Revision 1 6 2 Page 5 DSM250 User s Manual 3 Operating the DSM250 3 1 Turning the DSM250 On To turn on the DSM250 press the power key the leftmost of the five keys on the keypad The DSM250 will display a warning and ask you to press the Accept key to acknowledge the warning and continue operation of the DSM250 see Figure 5 below Cl JOPX Maretron DSM250 Maretron DSM250 Software Version 1 4 2 Model Version 2 0 serial Number 1319999 WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids to navigation and not as a replacement for traditional navigation aids and techniques Accept Figure 5 DSM250 Power Up Screen Alternatively you may power down the DSM250 by pressing and holding the power key see Section 3 2 below for details 3 2 Turning the DSM250 Off To turn the DSM250 off press and hold the power key The DSM250 will display a countdown screen which can be seen in Figure 6 If you continue to hold the power key the DSM250 will power down in approximately three seconds If you release
86. 0183 or NMEA 2000 factory default You should need to alter this setting only if e There are variation sources available on both the NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183 interfaces or e There is no magnetic variation source available If variation sources are available on both the NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183 interfaces you must tell the SSC200 SSC300 which source to use Figure 189 below shows the NMEA 0183 source selected This causes the SSC200 SSC300 to use variation data from the NMEA 0183 interface and ignore all other variation sources i e NMEA 2000 interface and manual entries Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 11720224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source WAVES Power Figure 189 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 Only Revision 1 6 2 Page 175 DSM250 User s Manual Figure 190 below shows the NMEA 2000 source selected Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate
87. 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 80 F Figure 235 WSO100 Device Label Menu 6 32 3 Installation Offset Calibration The WSO100 comes from the factory with a preset orientation so that mounting it with the orientation marks facing the bow of the vessel the sensor will read 0 apparent wind angle when the vessel is sailing directly into the wind please refer to the WSO100 User s Manual for details However the WS0100 can be installed in any orientation with respect to the vessel and any misalignment with respect to the factory preset can be easily compensated for using the Installation Offset calibration menu item To perform installation offset calibration use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the Installation Offset Calibration menu item and then press the Enter key The Installation Offset screen then appears which is shown in Figure 236 below Installation Offset 11 Point boat directly into wind and motor forward as fast as possible Apparent Direction Apparent Speed 177 4 ch Miles hour Accept Figure 236 W50100 Installation Offset Screen Turn the vessel directly into the wind and motor forward When you are satisfied that the apparent wind is directly on the bow of the vessel press the Accept key to set this angle to read 0 apparent wind on the WS0100 The WS0100 will
88. 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 8 2 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 1E 34567390100940 Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 200 Intermediate Level Calibration Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 201 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 11 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 12345 67 8 ann BUY EE Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 201 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value A screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 202 Revision 1 6 2 Page 183 DSM250 Use
89. 1 4 17 Added Configuration of VDR100 Network Parameters Removed 127502 from Supported PGN Table Added Configuration of SMS100 1 4 18 Added Device Configuration for SMS100 Updated Device Configuration for EMS100 IPG100 VDR100 Removed 127502 Binary Switch Control from supported PGN list Added 130834 and 130835 to supported PGN list Added SMS Phone Book Added Alert Configuration for SMS Text Messages Added Control Mode resetting of Trip Log Total Fuel Used Total Volume Anchor Watch Added information on SMS100 related display types Added information on Switch Indicator Hardware Timers and Counters Added information on CLM100 configuration and related data types Updated Supported PGN List Added Total Trip Fuel Used parameter Added information on settings lock mode Added total number of supported alerts Added SSC300 configuration same as SSC200 Page i WWW Revision 1 6 2 il Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Table of Contents o EEE EEE NE 1 RMN 1 1 2 PP 1 A JE ES 1 EE Ge e asis 1 VENN 2 2 1 WIRDAGKING NG BOX E 2 Ze GN A Mounung LoCo EE 2 2 3 Mounting the DSM250 rrnarevnarevranernnrennnnennanennnnennanennanennanennanennanennanennnnennanennanennnsennnsennnn 2 2 0 1 SUlace Mounting ING DES 2 2 3 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 occooccccoccccconccnoccononcononccnoncononconancononcononconancenancenancenancenanes 3 2 3 3 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 arrrnarrnnanevrarennnnrnnnnennnnennnnennnnrnn
90. 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode QUIS Vil ee TRE Power Figure 207 Configuring the Operating Mode 6 25 8 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the TLA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 208 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Gender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HUT SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender Hi Gauge Resistance to sender 364 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 208 Co
91. 100 Channel Configuration Screen ccccccccseeeeeceeeeeecaeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeesseeeeessaeeeees 199 Figure 227 USB100 Configuration Gcreen sssiinainis kaaa nanana naaa aai 200 Figure 228 USB100 Advanced Configuration Screen ooccccccnccnnccnncnnconaconcononnnnnnnncnnnnoncnnnnnnranononenns 200 Figure 229 USB100 Device Selection Gcreen 201 Figure 230 VDR100 Configuration Gcreen 202 Figure 231 VDR100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 202 Figure 232 WS0100 Configuration Gcreen aaa E EREE A aE RE 204 Figure 233 WSO100 Advanced Configuration ScCreen rrrrnnrnannnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrennnnnnennnnenennnnnnennnnnnee 205 Figure 234 WSO100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Green 206 Figure 235 WS0100 Device Label Men 207 Figure 236 WS0100 Installation Offset Screen ooncccccccnccccnnccnnnnoconnnononononanononacononannnonnnnnnnncnnnnns 207 Figure 237 WS50100 Configuration Aborted Due to Low Wind Speed oocccoocccccnoccnccnnccnconnnccnonnncos 208 Revision 1 6 2 Page xv DSM250 User s Manual Figure 238 Installation Offset Success Confirmation Screen rnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnvnvnnrenrnrrennnrrernnnrennnn 208 Figure 239 Installation Offset Abort Confirmation Sereen rrrrnrrnnnnennnnernnnrrnnnrnnnnernnnennnrennnnennnnen 209 Figure 240 Setting the Wind Data Damping Period 209 Figure 241 Setting the Barometric Pressure n nnnannnannnnnnnnnnenrnennnnrnnnernnrnnrrnnrrsn
92. 106 ER ENN 106 TN 106 0190 Eine EE 111 6 14 Maretron FPM100 CONQUE nn E 115 0 14 Advanced COMM fe ee EE 115 6 142 dv 117 6 15 Mar tron GPS 100 Rei gl elle ON aii 124 6151 Advanced COMO UI ANON BEE 125 SAR 129 6 153 GPS Mode SEN iii 129 6154 DEVICE e 130 615 5 SBAS WAAS Enable Disable Hare 130 6 16 Maretron GPS200 Configuration ccccoccnccccnncccncncnononononnnonannnonnnnnonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnonenoss 132 6 161 Advanced Ee edel te ici Sai 132 6 162 Cold SET GPS Le 134 6 16 3 DEVICE LaDainian EE EEGENEN 134 6 16 4 SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Disable cccoooncccccocconocooconccnanonconanonnnnnos 134 6 17 Maretron IPG100 Configuration occcccoonnnnccconnnnoconcnnncnnconononcnnonnanonnonannnconannnnonanennonancns 136 6172 Devices e EE 139 6173 Ne2kSenverRass Wo ld is a e ea DL do ld 139 6 174 Mareo GIOUG SCINVICCS EEN 139 HAB Or pp 139 AA A A eee 140 SE EE A A e OOO E A A 140 SEE EEE EE intactas aa 140 RENNE 140 6 18 Maretron J2K100 Configuration sip AA 140 6 181 Advanced inte o o eo io o a 141 6182 DENNE 144 6 18 3 NMEA 2000 Instance E ell 144 Page vi Revision 1 6 2 Maretron ble MMansmission te 144 6185 AC Icomaker INSTAR CC save 145 610 0 21930 SME NUSA 146 6 18 7 Refresh J1939 source address lei 147 6 19 Maretron NBE100 CORT QUIATON nicest sceteccctescsescsteneasusebaraeenatnatebacaredaeurebadesaussarebadesedssaceearerss 147 6 19 1 Advanced CGontfguraton 147 6 20 Maretron RAA100 Con
93. 143 J2K100 Engine Instance Configuration Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value you wish to use as the engine instance identifier and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 18 4 Transmission Instance This entry allows a transmission to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each transmission on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other transmissions on the network The NMEA2000 Transmission Instance menu item allows you to configure the transmission instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with transmission related NMEA 2000 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the NMEA2000 Transmission Instance menu item Then press the Enter key EW to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as shown in Figure 144 below Because only one such mapping can take place each Transmission and each Engine on the J1939 network must have its Page 144 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron own J2K100 Gateway The J1939 Source Address see section 6 18 4 identifies the transmission on the J1939 network the Transmission Instance identifies the transmission to the NMEA2000 network Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW AB
94. 19 Advanced Configuration Instance Label SMS100 Text Device Test Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 171 SMS100 Configuration Screen 6 23 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 18 Maretron SMS 100 1130021 20 20 19 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 172 SMS100 Advanced Configuration Menu 6 23 1 1 Device Instance Program this parameter to the desired instance number for this device You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 Page 164 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 23 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later The default installation description is blank text See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value
95. 218 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Revision 1 6 2 Page 193 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 8 2 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 1134567890118 BUG Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 218 Intermediate Level Calibration Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 219 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 14 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 1234567890120456 Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Fi
96. 24 Display Settings E 31 5 25 RAVEN MOd E 38 5 2 6 Favorite Screens Setup Menu senidetan a a 38 S2 OMG ME 43 ENN 47 5 Device Ee Mie TE EE 49 6 1 Amar Depth Speed Temperature Transducers cccceeccceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeesaeeesaeeesaaes 52 61 1 Advanced Gomigualuaavnree i 52 Gale DENE NE NAG 53 6ko IMStallatlon DESTO eee 53 6 14 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable isiu ue2ueenwe csnseemenecevmieveniemey ae 53 61 5 Clear opecd Keele e EE 53 SEN SPEEd CADAUNO va 54 6 1 7 Clear Temperature Offset unica Ee eEe EN SEENEN cea 54 0 1 8 Temperature alba a o 54 GLS ANSATTE NE RE desatado dolia 55 Cm PhO A a O o II O EEES 56 6 2 Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 Trim Tabs Configuration cccccceececseeeeceseeteeseetseeeeteeeeenenes 57 62 1 Tim Tabs Cally aU ON sanson t ops teitsiadl 57 63 MaretronlAGMI00 Gontiqur le 59 SE ONE e He Leien tel Hie D 59 632 AG GCNCUIL NPE Jarra 62 SE MENN RE 62 634 DEVICE NENNE area 62 635 o PEO 62 Page Iv Revision 1 6 2 Maretron bl Ee Tee TE 63 6 4 Maretron ALM100 Configuration occccoccncccccncconcncconnnononnnononnnonnnononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnns 64 JEG in eebe ek e a e EEE 64 042 E 65 CAS PN 65 Dd SS AIG AC E 66 6 5 Maretron CLM100 Configuration ccccoccnccccnncccnnncconnnononnnononnnonncnnonncnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnncncnnns 67 60 1 NNM 67 bo NENNE 68 6 5 3 Channel Configuration oocccccccccccocnnocccnnoconnnononnnonnnnonnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnrnno
97. 250 Main Menu can be seen in Figure 10 below Manual Favorite Screens Setup Units Figure 10 Main Menu The menu has the following structure Alert Setup 5 2 1 Add New Alert 8 2 Delete Alert 8 4 Edit Alert 8 5 Operating Mode 8 6 SMS Text Phone Book 0 Advanced Configuration 8 8 Restore Factory Defaults 8 9 Alert Status 5 2 2 Configuration Device Configuration 5 2 3 1 Device Selection 5 2 3 2 Display Settings Advanced Configuration 5 2 4 1 Advanced Information 5 2 4 2 Backlight 5 2 4 3 Color Setup 5 2 4 4 Demo Mode 5 2 4 5 Keypad Beep 5 2 4 6 Label 5 2 4 7 Language 5 2 4 8 Software Version 5 2 4 9 Favorite Screens Mode 5 2 4 7 Favorite Screens Setup 5 2 6 Units 5 2 6 4 2 Page 28 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 5 2 1 Alert Setup Menu selecting Alert Setup from the Main Menu allows you to create delete and edit the Alerts stored in the DSM250 and to change the operating mode of the vessel See section 7 25 for details on the Alerts 5 2 2 Alert Status Selecting Alert Status from the Main Menu will display a list of currently active Alerts in the DSM250 See section 8 1 1 for details on the Alert Status Screen 5 2 3 Configuration Menu The configuration menu allows you to change the configuration of certain types of Maretron NMEA 2000 devices as well as to select from which NMEA 2000 node
98. 250 continues to display the currently displayed favorite screen until you press the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys in which the DSM250 will display the next higher or lower numbered favorite screen respectively that is enabled for Manual mode Favorite Screens Setup Units Figure 24 Setting the Favorite Screens Mode 5 2 6 Favorite Screens Setup Menu The DSM250 supports the configuration of sixteen favorite screens The favorite setup screen allows you to select which of the sixteen favorite screens you wish to configure Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite 10 Favorite 11 Favorite 12 Figure 25 Favorite Screens Setup Screen Once you have selected a favorite screen to configure you will see the screen shown in Figure 26 The exact format of the setup screen will depend on the format chosen Page 38 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 1 LA Favorite Mode MILERE EJES Format 4 Quarters Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Fuel Management Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Figure 26 Favorite Screen Parameters 5 2 6 1 Favorite Mode This entry allows you to select in which display method of favorite screens mode this partic
99. 3 1 Alert Types There are two classes of alerts which are distinguished by their severity e Alarm An alarm is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring immediate attention or user intervention Alarms are shown in red when Active and always appear above the warnings on the Alert Status Screen e Warning A warning is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring non immediate attention for precautionary reasons Warnings are shown in yellow when Active and always appear below alarms on the Alert Status Screen 4 3 2 Alert Terminology The following alert terminology consistent with International Maritime Organization Code on Alarms and Indicators is used in N2KView and the DSM250 e Accept The user action of acknowledging the existence of an alert Alerts are only accepted when they are Active e Cancel The user action of removing an alert from the list of displayed alerts Alerts may only be cancelled if the condition causing the alert has been removed e Clear An alert is cleared when the condition causing the alert is removed This is not a user action e Trigger An alert is triggered when the condition monitored by the alert is met 4 3 3 Alert Priority Each alert has a priority which you can define ranging from 0 to 4000 with 0 the highest or most important priority and 4000 the lowest or least important priority Alarms always have a higher priority than Warnings i e an Alarm with a priority of 4000 has a
100. 3 1 Trigger Configuration Revision 1 6 2 Page 243 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Detail Instance ei Description Location d Trigger Configuration Trigger Type sData Unavailable Alert Re trigger Period 1 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Scroll Up Figure 288 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If a valid value for the parameter being monitored is continually not received or has an invalid value for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must continually be received with a valid value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive 8 3 7 4 Trigger Type is On Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals i e many different possible input values there are also switch
101. Book Advanced Configuration Restore Alert Setup Factory Defaults Figure 308 Editing the SMS Text Phone Book Once you have pressed Enter the screen will change to display the SMS Text Phone Book as shown in the figure below Alert Setup SMS Text Phone Book Phone Number Capt Bob First Mate Engineer Security Service UK Phone US from anywhere Sweden mobile number Figure 309 SMS Text Phone Book Screen To edit a number in the phone book press Scroll Up and Scroll Down until the desired entry is highlighted and then press Enter A popup window will enable you to edit the phone number for the entry as shown in the figure below Revision 1 6 2 Page 261 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Setup SMS Text Phone Book Phone Number 6029991212_ Figure 310 Phone Number Editing See Section 3 3 4 for details on editing the phone number Starting the phone number with the international prefix will allow the number to work regardless of what country the phone s SIM card phone number is registered in After you have edited the phone number and saved it by pressing Enter a second time after the last digit is entered you will then be given the chance to edit the name for the phone number as shown in Figure 311 below The purpose of this name is simply to make it easy to remember who the phone number is for Alert Setup SMS Text Phone Book Phone Number Des
102. C Current displays phase C current of the Utility Revision 1 6 2 Page 13 DSM250 User s Manual Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the utility Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase C Real Power displays real power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Power Factor displays power factor of phase C of the Utility 4 2 4 Anchor Watch The DSM250 provides a graphical display of the Anchor Alert section 8 3 7 9 parameters When the vessel is anchored the position of vessel at the point of dropping the anchor is entered in to the Anchor Alert plus the maximum distance that the boat can drift from that position normally a little more than the amount of Anchor Chain that you have let out If the boat moves beyond that radius an Alert is triggered The Anchor Watch display shows the last reported position of the vessel relative to the reported Anchor Drop position and the radius of the alert see section 7 1 for more details on the display You may use the control mode of the display to easily set the Anchor Drop position See Section 7 1 for details 4 2 5 DC The DSM250 supports the displa
103. Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity KEITA Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 25 Gauge Resistance to sender 364 Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 195 Configuring the Tank Capacity After you have pressed the Enter key a confirmation screen will appear that warns you that the fluid remaining measurement will change as a result of this change Press the Accept key to accept the change and store the new tank capacity value within the TLA100 or Press the Cancel Key 3 to cancel the change and leave the old tank capacity programmed into the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN A Changing tank capacity will affect Ta tank level readings Are you sure Gauge Resistance to sender 364 Power Cancel Figure 196 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Screen 6 25 4 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the TLA100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know how the resistance of the resistive tank level sender corresponds to the level of fluid in the tank There are three methods of calibrating the tank level sender Page 180 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks or non standard sensors
104. Configuration Screen 1 1 2 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 09 Maretron IPG 100 120002 10 3 6 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 2 Installation Description N2KServer Information Maretron Cloud Services Status Restore Factory Defaults Figure 134 IPG100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 17 1 1 Device Instance Program this parameter to the desired instance number for this device You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default device instance is 0 Page 136 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 17 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later The default installation description is blank text 6 17 1 3 N2KServer Information This entry allows you to view various information about the N2KServer running on the IPG100 The following sections describe the entries in this menu Configuration Device Con
105. Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal status Calibration Completed Figure 58 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Complete Screen Press the Back button to return to the previous menu 6 6 3 DC Type You can configure the DCM100 as to what type of DC power source it is monitoring With the exception of the Battery type the value of this parameter is used only for reporting the power source type over the NMEA 2000 network However if you select the Battery type many battery related options become available The following DC Types are selectable e Battery e Alternator e Convertor Revision 1 6 2 Page 73 DSM250 User s Manual e Solar Cell e Wind Generator If the DC Type is set to battery then the following options may be entered to characterize the battery and allow the estimation of remaining charge etc 6 6 3 1 Battery Type The available battery types are Flooded Wet Gel AGM Other Selecting one of these types causes the remaining parameters to be set to appropriate default values 6 6 3 2 Nominal Voltage You may program here the nominal voltage of the battery which is used only for reporting over the NMEA 2000 network Available choices are 6 12 24 32 36 42 and 48 Volts 6 6 3 3 Equalization You may indicate here whether or not the battery supports equalization This is used only for reporting over the NMEA 2000 network Available choices are e Supported e Not Supported 6 6 3 4 Tempe
106. Direction Ground Referenced Wind Speed Ground Referenced Heat Index Wind Chill Outside Temperature Outside Humidity Barometric Pressure Inside Temperature Inside Humidity Dew Point Moon Phase Sunrise Sunset Revision 1 6 2 Page 227 DSM250 User s Manual 7 19Wind Rose The DSM250 supports a wind rose display which displays apparent wind direction and speed measured relative to the moving vessel or true wind direction and speed measured relative to the moving vessel depending on the parameter selected A screen shot of a wind rose appears in Figure 267 below Figure 267 Wind Rose Display 7 20Moon Phase Display The DSM250 supports a moon phase display which shows the current phase of the moon at the current location An example screenshot of the moon phase display appears in Figure 268 below Moon Phase Last Quarter Figure 268 Moon Phase Display 7 21SMS Signal Strength Bar The SMS Signal Strength Bar display shows the signal strength detected by the SMS100 SMS Text Module from the connected cellular network Figure 269 below shows an example of this type of display Page 228 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron SMS 0 Signal Strength 81 dBm Figure 269 SMS Signal Strength Bar Display 7 22 Trim Tabs Bar Graph Display The DSM250 supports a trim tab display in which the relative positions of the port and starboard trim tabs are displayed on a dual bar graph A screenshot of the trim tab di
107. Figure 111 Intermediate Level Calibration rrrranrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnenrnnnenrnnnennansennassennnssnnnnn 121 Figure 112 Ful Level CAPEINN WE 121 Figure 113 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen occcccccncccoccnoconnnonannnnnannnnnncnnnnns 122 Figure 114 Rectangular Tank CGalbraton 122 Figure 115 FPM100 Channel Pressure Vacuum Mode Configuration cccoccccccccncccnnnconannnnnos 123 Figure 116 PN NT VS Ne 124 Figure 117 GPS100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 125 Figure 118 Configuring Antenna Altitude on a GPS100 eernnrrvvrnnrrvvnnnnrvenrnnerennnnerennnnerennnnerennnnvne 125 Figure 119 Configuring Satellite Elevation Mask on a GPS100 ooocccccnccccccnnccncnnnccncnnnncncnnancnnnnnncons 126 Figure 120 Configuring PDOP Mask on a GPS100 ooccccoccncccccnccnccnccoccnocononononononnnnnonncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnns 127 Figure 121 Configuring SNR Mask on a GbHG100 127 Figure 122 GPS100 NMEA 20008 PGN Enable Disable Green 128 Figure 123 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS100 urnnrrvvnnnvrvvnnnrrrennnnerennnnerennnnerennnnvrennnnvne 129 Figure 124 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS100 ranrrrnnnnrnrvvnnnnrvnnnnnrnnrnnnrennnnnrennnnnsennnnsnrnnnnnnee 129 Figure 125 Configuring GPS Operating Mode on a GbPGTO00 130 Fe 126 COmiounnd SBA S ON a Gr E LR E 131 Figure 127 GPS200 Configuration Gcreen 132 Figure 128 GPS200 Advanced Co
108. M250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 11720224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period A Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 186 Programming SSC200 SSC300 Rate of Turn Damping Period 6 24 8 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration The DSM250 is capable of displaying rate of turn information from a Maretron SSC200 SSC300 compass Although the compass provides very accurate rate of turn information it can drift off of zero even though the vessel is not turning Fortunately the SSC200 SSC300 can learn the zero offset for different conditions found on the vessel You teach the compass these zero offset values by pressing the Enter key with the Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration menu item selected which causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 187 The Rate of Turn Offset Calibration should be done before the Deviation Calibration Section 6 24 5 of Turn Zero 11 The vessel must remain absolutely still during calibration no pitch or roll or turning Current Rate of Turn yO i 2 Imin 12 Press lt Begin gt to start calibration takes aproximately 45
109. Maretron DST100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring Maretron s DST100 for several different parameters including trip log resetting transducer depth offset and speed calibration This describes the configuration of the Maretron DST100 firmware version 1 0 1 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SW 00 Haretron DST 0 9999 10 10 th Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 speed Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 0 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 79 DST100 Configuration Screen 6 10 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW Maretron DST 10 w9 10 10 b2 Advanced Configuration Device Instance f Installation Description Figure 80 DST100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 10 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 90 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 10 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you lik
110. Maretron J2K 100 1210008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEAZ000 Instance Engine d Transmission CU ACllee maker 0 J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JHW S None Figure 144 J2K100 NMEA2000 Transmission Instance Configuration Use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down EY keys to change the value to the desired value you wish to use as the transmission instance identifier and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 18 5 AC Icemaker Instance This entry allows an air conditioner or icemaker to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each air conditioner or icemaker on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other air conditioners or icemakers on the network The AC lcemaker menu item allows you to configure the air conditioner or instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with air conditioner or icemaker related NMEA 20009 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the AC Icemaker menu item Then press the Enter key EY to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as shown in Figure 145 below Because only one such mapping can take place each air conditioner or icemaker on the J1939 network must have its own J2K100 Gateway Th
111. OOM HEAT Indicator 4 Restore Factory Defaults Figure 255 Selection of an Individual Indicator Light Figure 276 below shows the configuration menu for each individual indicator light Revision 1 6 2 Page 219 DSM250 User s Manual Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Windows 1 ENG ROOM HATCH Indicator Indicator 1 AFT BILGE Color Off Green Color On Red ENG ROOM HEAT Color Error None SEI AFT SIM Channel 1 LAZ SMOKE Title Label LAZ SMOKE Font Size Large Restore Factory Defaults Figure 256 Configuration of an Individual Indicator Light Each indicator light has several configurable parameters e Color Off select the color to be displayed when the indicator is in the OFF state The default color is gray e Color On select the color to be displayed when the indicator is in the ON state The default color is green e Color Error select the color to be displayed when the indicator is in the ERROR state which may indicate faulty sensor or connection The default color is red e Instance the instance number of the switch bank containing the indicator to be monitored e Channel the channel number of the indicator to be monitored e Title Sets the text string to be displayed on the indicator light Please refer to Section 5 2 6 4 4 for details e Font Size Sets the size of the font used to display the label on the indicator light You may select Small Medium
112. OR Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the ERROR state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Page 18 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Hardware OFF Timer displays the value of a hardware timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the OFF state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ON Timer displays the value of a hardware timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the ON state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ERROR Timer displays the value of a hardware timer in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that accumulates the elapsed time that the indicator has spent in the ERROR state This timer may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details 4 2 17 Mechanical dB displays a level sound power measured by a sensor that transmits a decibel level Force displays mechanical force from a load cell Strain displays the amount of mechanical strain an object is subjected to 4 2 18 Motion Acceleration displays acceleration Angle
113. PDOP Mask GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 120 Configuring PDOP Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for PDOP Mask are between 1 and 20 This number represents the Position Dilution of Precision which indicates the accuracy of the computed position and is a function of the positions of the received satellites If the PDOP of a given position solution is above the value of this parameter then the GPS100 will report that no fix is obtained Disabling the PDOP Mask by setting the value to will cause the GPS100 to report any position fixes obtained regardless of the accuracy of the fix 6 15 1 5 SNR Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the SNR Signal to Noise Ratio Mask on a GPS100 You choose this setting by pressing the Enter key EW with the GPS SNR Mask menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 121 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HUT Swe 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 228 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 121 Configuring SNR Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for the SNR Mask are betwe
114. RU Gal W AY sere ce ats o tiles eee ase eee 204 SE DEAE IN EE 204 6 32 Maretron WSO100 Configuration ccccoccccccccncccncnccncnnononnnononononannnonnnnononcnnnnnnnononcncnonennss 204 6 32 1 Advanced COMNGUFAN OM DEE 204 E E Ree 206 6 32 3 Installation Of set CAP ON rss 207 6 324 Wind Data Damping Pero e EE 209 6 9220 Bal OMMCUIC PIESSUE EE 209 63260 QUiside AMIN 210 6 327 Quiside Temperature olaaa 210 Datla Display IDO Sisa ri A CEEE Peene 212 Tal FOO VM DIS Dlls 212 La BA NNN 213 73 COMPASS ROSE II lors 213 dE DEAN 215 ae DA TNT 215 TO GUESS 216 TT GPS SES e o 217 Te nal Gauge LE EE EE 218 TT AAPP a E 218 TE pe deg DE A OR PN 220 FA NUMEROS IN vvs 222 EE 222 TAS EP 224 TA SMS EEN 224 Page vill Revision 1 6 2 Maretron gt ENN 225 FIS MENS vr 225 TVR SN 226 7 18 Weather Display ccccccccscccseecseeceseeceeecseeceusecaeeseeseueeeacesseeseueeeeeesseetueseaeesseesseeseeess 226 LAT WANN TOS eat 228 1 20 NTE BIER 228 7 21 SMS Signal Strength Bar 228 fee WU FAS BT NNN estoi dodne 229 ias MTU Vit 229 7 24 Tank Gauge DISDIAY rccccsccceccedexenssavexcisnadacenesdowsieets enceaedesiessa stekecsadavenssdesaieetedexsecxedexsesees 230 Teo VISTE 230 7 26 Switch Breaker Display ooccccoccccoccccconccconoconnnonnnnnnnnonnncononcnonnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnaninnns 231 inci 235 8 1 Displaying Active AE vvs penere 235 8 1 1 Alert Status Gcreen ccc eecccceeeecceeeeseeeees
115. Rate Selection Screen cccseeceeneeeeeeees 169 Figure 179 SSC200 SSC300 Load Default Periodic Rate Selecti0N ooccccoccccccccnncconnnonannnnnos 169 Figure 180 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 170 Figure 181 SSC200 SSC300 Installation Offset Calibration Screen occoocccccncconococononncconiconononos 171 Figure 182 Setting the Installation Orientation ooocccconnnccccnncccnnncconnncnnnnncnonnnonncnnonannnonnnnnonannnnnns 171 Figure 183 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Start Gcreen 172 Figure 184 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Progress Gcreen 173 Figure 185 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Status Screen rrrnnnnrrnnnnnvnvnnnenrnnnernnrrennnnrennnn 173 Figure 186 Programming SSC200 SSC300 Rate of Turn Damping Period occcoccccccnccocnccoo 174 Figure 187 SSC200 SSC300 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Screen ooocccocccccncconicoconono 174 Figure 188 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000 factory default 175 Figure 189 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 On 175 Page xiv Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 190 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 2000 Only ooooocccnccncccccnononococononononccononononanonoranonanos 176 Figure 191 Entering Manual Vartatnon 176 Figure 192 TLATOO Configuration SCLC EE 178 Figure 193 TLA100 Advanced Configuration Gcr
116. Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Outside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Selecting this will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 8 3 7 8 Trigger Type is Inside Radius Alert The Inside Radius Alert is similar to the Outside Radius Alert except that an alert is activated if the vessel comes within a certain distance or radius of a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude Figure 294 shows an Inside Radius Alert and associated parameters 8 3 7 8 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type inside Radius Alert Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3 00 Nautical Miles Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 3 50 Nautical Miles Alert Cl
117. SM250 is capable of enabling or disabling the SBAS WAAS function on a Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS200 You can change this setting by pressing the Enter key EW with the SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 126 to be displayed Page 134 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHE HW SW 22 Maretron DS AN 143001 10 106 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine Label SPELE EA NER ET ON Disable Figure 132 Configuring SBAS on a GPS200 The allowable option for SBAS configuration are either Disable which causes the GPS200 not to use SBAS satellites or Enable which causes the GPS200 to use SBAS satellites for developing a position fix Revision 1 6 2 Page 135 DSM250 User s Manual 6 17Maretron IPG100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron IPG100 firmware version 3 6 0 The DSM250 is capable of configuring settings for the Internet Protocol Gateway IPG100 A screenshot of the IPG100 configuration menus is shown in Figure 133 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW 09 Maretron IPG 100 120002 10 361 Device Label Alex IPG N2KServer Password Maretron Cloud Services Enable DHCP Yes IP Address 10 0 0 6 7 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 0 0 1 Default DNS 10 0 0 3 1 Figure 133 IPG100
118. SM250 will be deleted This command will also copy the SMS Text Phone Book settings Figure 70 below shows this menu item highlighted Page 84 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW T Maretron DSM20 1300178 10 13 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local mad tr play Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Figure 70 DSM150 DSM250 Copy alarms settings from local display After you select this menu item and press Enter the alarm settings from this DSM250 unit will be copied to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit 6 9 3 Copy device selection from local display Since it is normally desirable for all DSM150 DSM250 units on a network to display the same sensors it is possible to copy the device selection settings from a DSM250 unit to a remotely located DSM150 DSM250 In this way it is possible to make all device selection changes on a single DSM150 DSM250 unit and then quickly and conveniently duplicate these new device selection settings on other DSM150 DSM250 units attached to the network Figure 71 below shows this menu item highlighted Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 17 Maretron DSM250 1300178 10 13 Advanced Configuration Copy a
119. SN HUT SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode LU KOR BENET SETTET Gauge Resistance to sender Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Power Figure 160 RAA100 Setting the Operating Mode Revision 1 6 2 Page 155 DSM250 User s Manual 6 20 6 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the RAA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 161 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Gender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the RAA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge
120. SSC200 SSC300 may be programmed using the DSM250 display This can be used for initial programming of a SSC200 SSC300 compass even if only the NMEA 0183 interface is to be used after installation is complete Figure 177 below shows the possible programming options for the NMEA 0183 interface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 99 Maretron SoC 1120707 20 2011 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings GET 15 4800 bps Sentence Rate Selection Load Default Sentence Rate Selection Figure 177 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 0183 Settings Screen 6 24 1 3 1 Baud Rate The SSC200 SSC300 compass supports NMEA0183 communication at both 4800 baud and 38400 baud All SSC200 SSC300 Compasses are shipped with a baud rate of 4800 baud This value may be changed by selecting the Baud Rate option in the menu and pressing Enter The use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the desired baud rate and press Enter to save the value 6 24 1 3 2 Sentence Rate Selection The NMEA 0183 interface is a very low bandwidth interface The SSC200 SSC300 is capable of transmitting a wide variety of NMEA 0183 sentences and can exceed the bandwidth of the NMEA 0183 interface if all sentences are transmitted at maximum rates causing lost data in NMEA 0183 multiplexers or on the SSC200 SSC300 interface itself It is important therefore to limit the types of NMEA 0183 sentences transmitted only to those that are nec
121. SW D Maretron ALH 10 14650041 10 10 5 Advanced Configuration Device Instance TS Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 48 ALM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 4 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 4 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was Page 64 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 4 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The ALM100 Annunciator Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 130824 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 49 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW D Maretron ALH 10 14650041 10 10 5 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable IN Annunciator Ot Figure 49 ALM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable
122. Se el GN Off Reset Counter Reset Timer Scroll Up Figure 64 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen DCR Mode 6 7 4 1 1 Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 7 4 1 2 Operating Mode The operating mode of each channel may be set to either DCR DC Relay in which case the state of the channel is controlled by Circuit Breaker Switch controls in N2KView or Switch Breaker favorite screens in the DSM150 DSM250 displays This section of the manual assumes the operating mode has been set to DCR 6 7 4 1 3 Switch Lock The default state of a channel in DCR Switch Lock mode is Unlocked In the Unlocked mode the channel may be turned on and off from network display devices By setting the Switch Lock mode of the channel to Lock then channel will not change state until the Switch Lock mode has once again been set to Unlocked 6 7 4 1 4 Power Up State This entry defines the state of the channel when the DCR100 is powered up You may set this entry of Off in which the channel powers up in the Off state the solid state relay is open You may also set this entry to On in which the channel powers up in the On state the solid state relay is closed Finally you may set this entry to Previous in which the channel powers up to the state it wa
123. Settings Screen Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to highlight the desired entry and press Enter to edit it The screen will change to the SMS Text Phone Number x screens shown in Figure 301 below SMS Text Phone Number 1 ZEIEN Enable send when Cleared Enable Phone Number 6025551212 Capt Bob Figure 301 SMS Text Phone Number x Screen This contains the following fields Revision 1 6 2 Page 255 DSM250 User s Manual e Send When Triggered an Enable value in this field will cause a SMS text message to be sent to the number in the Phone Number field whenever the alert is triggered A Disable value will cause the display to not send a text message to this number in this case e Send When Cleared an Enable value in this field will cause a SMS text message to be sent to the number in the Phone Number field whenever the alert is cleared A Disable value will cause the display to not send a text message to this number in this case e Phone Number use this field to select one of the phone number entries from the phone book 8 3 12 Operating Mode Moored see Section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Moored state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then p
124. TS Favorite 16 Switch B reaker O deitsch Switch Breaker 1 Switch Breaker 2 Switch Breaker 3 Switch Breaker 4 Restore Factory Defaults Figure 275 Selection of an Individual Switch Breaker Figure 276 below shows the configuration menu for each individual switch breaker Favorite Screens Setup weu LIGHTS Favorite 16 Windows 1 NAV LIGHTS Switch Breaker Q Switch Breaker 1 NAV ELECT eo ff Gray Color On Green Color Error Red Type Toggle Switch Instance ei HELM RELAY BOX Channel 1 HELM LIGHTS Title Label HELM LIGHTS Font Size Large Figure 276 Configuration of an Individual Switch Breaker Each switch breaker has several configurable parameters e Color Off select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the OFF state The default color is gray e Color On select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the ON state The default color is green e Color Error select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the ERROR state which may indicate a tripped breaker The default color is red Page 232 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron e Type you may choose between the default value of Toggle in which case the switch breaker changes state every time you press the power button while it is highlighted or Momentary in which case the switch breaker is turned on only while you are pressing the power button
125. Temp Fuel Pressure Fuel Rate Oil Pressure Oil Temp Tachometer Tilt Trim Voltage Fuel Economy Fuel Consumption Percent Load Percent Torque Trip Fuel Used Warning Indicators Environment Barometer Heat Index Humidity Inside Humidity Outside Moon Phase Sunrise Sunset Dew Point Temp Engine Room Temp Inside Temp Main Cabin Temp Outside Temp Sea Twilight AM Twilight PM Weather Wind Chill Fluid Flow Flow Rate Trip Volume Revision 1 6 2 Page 267 DSM250 User s Manual Fuel Management Distance to Empty Time to Empty Total Fuel Capacity Total Fuel Level Total Fuel Consumption Total Trip Fuel Used Total Fuel Economy Total Fuel Rate Total Fuel Remaining GPS Status Hardware OFF Counter Hardware ON Counter Hardware ERROR Counter Hardware ON Timer Hardware OFF Timer Hardware ERROR Timer Acceleration Angle Angular Velocity Angular Acceleration Distance Rotational Rate Velocity BOD BIW COG XTE DTW ETA Lat Lon Rolling Road Set Drift SOG TTG VMG Waypoint Number amp Name Altimeter Barometric Compressed Air Engine Boost Engine Coolant Engine Fuel Engine Oil Hydraulic Oil Steam Transmission Oil User Defined Water Rudder peed anks Bait Well Battery Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Room Exhaust Gas Freezer Heat Index Heating System Inside Live Well Main Cabin Outside Refrigeration Sea Transmission Oil User Defined Wind Chill Local Date UTC Date M
126. Velocity Acceleration Angle Angular Velocity Angular Acceleration Rotational Rate Temperature Pressure Humidity Force Flow Rate Strain Disable the channel is disabled and transmits no data over the NMEA 2000 network Revision 1 6 2 Page 69 DSM250 User s Manual 6 5 3 3 Instance From here the instance number used in the message send for this channel may be set 6 5 3 4 Source This parameter is present only when the channel has been configured for the function of Temperature Pressure Humidity or Flow Rate This parameter selects the type of temperature pressure humidity or flow rate measurement being performed so that displays can more easily select the data from the network 6 5 3 5 Value at 4mA Program this parameter to match the reading of the current loop transducer when it is sourcing a current of 4mA You can determine this value by examining the specification of the transducer being used 6 5 3 6 Value at 20mA Program this parameter to match the reading of the current loop transducer when it is sourcing a current of 20mA You can determine this value by examining the specification of the transducer being used 6 5 3 7 Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the parametric readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 1 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 6 Maretron DCM100 Configuration This describ
127. above the value specified in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Data Unavailable Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value is not received or is received but with a value of Data Not Available for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field On Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes ON for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Off Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes OFF for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Tripped Alert The alert will become active if the monitored circuit breaker becomes Tripped for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Course Alert The alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Direction by more than the Offset COG Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field GPS Quality Alert The alert will become active if the GPS Quality drops below the level set in the GPS Quality Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Outside Radius Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Inside Radius Alert The alert will
128. actory Defaults Figure 168 SIM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 22 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 6 2 Page 161 DSM250 User s Manual 6 22 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 22 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The SIM100 Switch Indicator Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 127501 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 169 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW D3 Maretron SIM 100 HR 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 127301 Dina Switch Bank Status Figure 169 SIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressin
129. agement Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Figure 27 Setting the Favorite Screen Format 5 2 6 3 Auto Change Interval In Auto mode this parameter determines the amount of time this favorite screen is displayed before the DSM250 automatically cycles to the next higher numbered favorite screen in the auto mode This parameter is programmable to anywhere between 1 second and 180 seconds Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 ole Favorite Mode Auto Manual EA Format 4 Quarters Auto Change Interval ERTI Window 1 Data Fuel Management Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 28 Setting the Auto Change Interval Page 40 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 5 2 6 4 Window Data The Window Data section of the menu allows you to select a particular type of data to be displayed in each part of the screen Selecting the data to be displayed is a two step process First press the Enter key and select the category of data to be displayed Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data NTE Apparent Direction Type Numeric Instance 0 Title Default Win
130. alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as On causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as false i e binary 0 then the alert becomes inactive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the switch must remain On for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain Off for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive Page 244 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 8 3 7 4 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Channel 1 Aft Bilge Pump Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Re trigger Period 1 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuo us Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Power Bach Scroll Scroll Up Down Enter Figure 289 Trigger Configuration On Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will re
131. alibration The temperature calibration screen shown below indicates the sea temperature as measured by the Airmar temperature transducer which can be changed to the actual sea temperature by following these steps Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it Page 54 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron matches the known sea temperature Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform temperature calibration at this time press the Abort key and the temperature calibration will not be altered Water Temperature Calibration 1 Select Water Temperature 83 4 TE 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 36 Airmar Temperature Transducer Water Temperature Calibration Screen 6 1 9 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the transducer depth offset parameter in an Airmar depth transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should program a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the depth transducer The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the depth transducer to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the depth transducer and th
132. alibration Capacity Estimation The next step in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 110 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Current Point highlight will advance to the next point Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point Bl 23456 78 IWA BHG Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 110 Empty Level Calibration Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and a
133. alibration and revert to old calibration data Power Figure 156 RAA 100 Center Rudder Angle Calibration The third step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process Is to turn the wheel hard over to port and to measure the angle or the rudder angle from center with a protractor or other instrument Use the Increase and Decrease keys until the highlighted rudder angle value is at the measured value and then press Enter to accept the value and store it within the RAA100 Figure 155 shows a screenshot of the starboard rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 11 Turn wheel hard over to port 12 Use arrow keys to select rudder angle 3 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at hard over port position 14 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 157 RAA 100 Port Rudder Angle Calibration Once you have accepted the port rudder angle value a confirmation screen appears indicating that the rudder angle calibration has been successfully completed Figure 158 below shows a screenshot of this confirmation screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 153 DSM250 User s Manual Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibrat
134. also most accurate in any case but requires more effort e Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm use for rectangular tanks using a tank level sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms at full 33 ohms at empty e Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm use for rectangular tanks using a tank level sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms at full 180 ohms at empty 6 25 4 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current fluid level The TLA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the fluid levels Figure 197 below shows a screenshot of the DSM250 with the Custom Calibration option highlighted Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks and for non standard values of resistances for tank level senders To perform custom calibration of the tank level sender use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key 3 to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW 10 Maretron TLA 10 20907151 10 14 Tank Le
135. an be given a software label Normally this label will indicate the position of the DSM250 and is used by the Alert System to identify one DSM250 from another Display Settings Advanced Configuration Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep On Label Language English Software Version 1 6 2 3 Figure 23 Editing the DSM250 Label 5 2 4 8 Language The DSM250 currently supports two languages English and Dutch Nederlands Support for other languages is planned for future firmware releases To change the currently used language use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight to the Language menu item and then press the Enter key EY to move the highlight to the language selection on the right Use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to change the selection to the desired value and then press the Enter key to confirm your selection The DSM250 will then reset itself after which the selected language will be used for menus and titles 5 2 4 9 Software Version This field displays the version of the Firmware running in the DSM250 Revision 1 6 2 Page 37 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 5 Favorite Screens Mode The DSM250 supports two methods of operation in favorites mode Auto in which the DSM250 automatically cycles through all favorite screens that have been enabled for Auto mode and Manual in which the DSM
136. ance E Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 34 Airmar Transducer Advanced Configuration Screen 6 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The transducer transmits several different NMEA2000 PGN s which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable screen You can enable or disable the transmission of these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The message will not be transmitted e On The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA 2000 rate select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 1 5
137. arnrnnannennnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennansennnnsennnnsnnnunennnnnsnn 3 PTE F ISM AVIOUNUNG MES PS 4 Figure 3 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 rrannvnanrnnnnrnvnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnsnnnnsnnnnennnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnsne 5 Figure 4 NMEA 2000 Connector Face View 5 Figure 5 DSM250 Power Up Gcreen 6 Figure 6 Powerdown Countdown Gcreen 7 Figure 7 Keypad and Key NAMES vene 7 FE ETT EK rias 9 Figure 9 DSM250 Running in Favorite Screens Mode occccoccncccccncccccnccoconoconcnnononononacononanncnnncncnonens 27 FETT MN 28 Figure 11 Configuration Screen occcccoccnccncnnccocnnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnonarnnnnnrnenennnnnnanos 29 Figure 12 Device Selection SAUEN EE 30 Figure 13 DSM250 Display Settings Gcreen 31 Figure 14 DSM250 Advanced CGonfguraton 31 Figure 15 DSM250 Primary Device Gelechon e E EEEE EESE EEA ER 32 Figure 16 DSM250 Advanced Information Gcreen 33 Figure 17 Bus Status Display 33 FETE BAGO LE EE 34 Equis 19 Color Palette Selection SAUEN WE 35 Figure 20 Color Palette Configuration Gcreen 35 Fe die The Demo ModE EE 36 Figure 22 Setting the Keyboard Beep Cotton 37 Figure 23 Editing TNE DSM250 Las 37 Figure 24 Setting the Favorite Screens Mode 38 Figure 25 Favorite Screens Setup Gcreen 38 Figure 26 Favorite Screen Parameters rrrarrrnanannanenranerranenrnnennnnennnnennanennanennanennnnenn
138. as been set to Two Independent Sensors The Channel 0 Two Independent Sensors Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1619099 10 1121 Channel 3 Phase Engine Instance 0 Engine Label PORT ENGINE K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 05 Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Figure 98 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW 69 Maretron FFH 400 1679009 10 1121 Channel A Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label PORT FUEL TEMP Fluid Type Fuel Flow Instance 0 Flow Label PORT FUEL FLOW Volume Instance 0 PO Tae PORT FUEL VOLUME Figure 99 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode Revision 1 6 2 Page 109 DSM250 User s Manual 6 13 4 2 1 Sensor You may select whether this channel is connected to a 3 phase sensor Maretron fuel flow sensors with three pulse outputs or a 1 phase sensor other manufacturer s fluid flow sensors with a single pulse output 6 13 4 2 2 Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instance number of the flow rate and
139. ation Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW AS Maretron JAM 1210008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine d Transmission ACllce maker ei J1939 Source Address 1 Refresh J1939 source address list JHW S None Figure 146 J2K100 J1939 Source Address Configuration To set the J1939 source address use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the J1939 Source Address menu item Press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the source address value on the right as shown in Figure 146 above Then use the Scroll Up and Page 146 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Scroll Down keys to change the J1939 Source Address value until it matches the J1939 source address of the engine genset or transmissions for which you desire this J2K100 to translate data onto the NMEA 2000 network 6 18 7 Refresh J1939 source address list The configuration screen for the J2K100 will examine the bus to determine to which devices it can connect This is presented in a list at the bottom of the screen To update the list after adding a device highlight this entry and press the Enter button 6 19Maretron NBE100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron NBE100 Network Bus Extender This describes the configuration of the Maretron NBE100 firmware version 1 0 0 The NBE100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 147 below Configuration
140. ation Rectangular Tank Empty Tank Depth 10 0 Full Tank Depth 2 0 Figure 222 Rectangular Tank Calibration Enter the distance from the face of the TLM100 sensor to the bottom of the tank for the Empty Tank Depth and the distance from the face of the TLM100 sensor to the top of the liquid when the tank is full for the Full Tank Depth After entering the values use the Back button to return the parent menu 6 26 5 Tank Number The Tank Number is the Data Instance used in the data message This can be set from 0 to 15 6 26 6 Tank Type This is set to the type of fluid in the tank Values are Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 1 Reserved 7 These values may be used when the contents of the tank does not fit into one of the categories above 6 27Maretron TLM150 Configuration The TLM150 is the gasoline version of the TLM100 The configuration of the two devices is the same see Section 6 26 for details 6 28Maretron TLM200 Configuration The TLM200 is the deep tank version of the TLM100 The configuration of the two devices is the same see Section 6 26 for details Page 196 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 29Maretron TMP100 Configuration Maretron Temperature Modules TMP100 may be configured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron TMP100 firmware version 1 1 1 The top level of the TMP100 configuration menu Is shown below Configuration
141. ays the level of fluid in the tank as a percentage of its capacity Remaining displays the amount of fluid in the tank 4 2 26 Temperature The display supports the display of temperatures Each temperature sender on the bus is required to state the source of the temperature which may be one of Bait Well Battery Dew Point Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Room Exhaust Gas Freezer Heat Index Heating System Inside Live Well Main Cabin Outside Refrigeration Sea Transmission Oil User Defined 129 User Defined 144 Wind Chill 4 2 27 Time Date Local Date displays the current date referenced to the local time offset see Section 5 2 7 12 on page 45 for details on how to set the local time offset UTC Date displays the current date referenced to Universal Time Coordinated Moon Phase displays the phase of the moon at the current time and position Sunrise displays the local time of sunrise for the current day and position Sunset displays the local time of sunset for the current day and position Local Time displays the current time referenced to the local time offset see Section 5 2 7 12 on page 45 for details on how to set the local time offset UTC Time displays the current time referenced to Universal Time Coordinated also known as Greenwich Mean Time or GMT Twilight AM displays the time of nautical twilight i e the time of day when the sun is 12 degrees below the horizon in the morning for the
142. be changed to the transmitted STW by following these steps First pick a speed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired Speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase and Decrease EY keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept EY key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform speed calibration at this time press the Abort 9 key and the speed calibration will not be altered 6 1 7 Clear Temperature Offset The Clear Temperature Offset configuration parameter shows you the currently used temperature correction offset All measured sea temperature readings have this value added to them before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can set the correction offset to zero by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 3 This changes the correction factor back to 0 such that all subsequent measured sea temperature readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network 6 1 8 Temperature C
143. ce number of the flow rate and total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 Revision 1 6 2 Page 107 DSM250 User s Manual 6 13 4 1 3 Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 13 4 1 4 K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 13 4 1 5 Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 13 4 1 6 Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to reset the total volume recorded to zero 6 13 4 1 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 1 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for thi
144. ced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite a from local ie del opy L Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Figure 73 DSM150 DSM250 Copy favorite settings from local display By selecting this menu item and pressing Enter all the favorite screen settings will be copied from the local DSM150 DSM250 to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit After copying favorite screen settings it is necessary to restart the remote unit screen which can be seen in Figure 74 below will appear indicating that favorite settings have been successfully transferred to the remote DSM150 DSM250 and that the remote DSM150 DSM250 must be restarted to complete the operation Press Enter to restart the remote DSM150 DSM250 unit complete the favorite settings transfer operation and return to the previous menu selection Page 86 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW Press any key to restart the target device and continue Power Bach BE Scroll Down Enter Figure 74 Favorite Settings Transfer Completion Screen 6 9 6 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display DST100 calibration data is not stored in the DST100 device Rather each DSM150 DSM250 needs to apply its own set of calibrati
145. ced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea 6 5 3 Channel Configuration Individual channels may be configured by using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then pressing the Enter key The following screen will be displayed Page 68 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW 59 Maretron CLM 400 16599011 10 Channel 4 EAH Shaft Bearing Temp Function Temperature Instance 4 Source User Defined 129 Value at 4 mA 0 Value at 20 mA 500 0 F Data Damping Period 0 25 Scroll Up Figure 53 CLM100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 5 3 1 Label A label may be assigned to each channel of the CLM100 as an aid to identifying the parameter that is being displayed Typically this label will describe the function or location of the sensor 6 5 3 2 Function The CLM100 can support 4 20mA current loop transducers of many different types This field allows you to select the type of parameter that is being monitored by this channel You may select from the following parameter types please refer to the CLM100 User s Manual tor information on the available units ranges and resolutions for each function dB decibels DC Voltage DC Current Resistance Distance
146. ciators while the appropriate user action is being taken To prevent an alert that has accepted by the user from being forgotten an accepted alert will transition back to being Active after a period of time set by the user If the condition causing the alert is rectified cleared the alert will transition to the Inactive state You may disable the alert at this time causing it to become a Disabled Alert Awaiting Cancel An Alert in the Awaiting Cancel state is an alert where the condition that caused the alarm or warning has been removed without the alert being accepted while it was Revision 1 6 2 Page 25 DSM250 User s Manual Active To avoid such alerts from being missed by the user the alert is required to be cancelled You may cancel the alert at this time causing it to become an nactive Alert or you may disable the alert causing it to become a Disabled Alert Should the condition trigger the alert again the alert will transition back to the Active state incrementing a counter which is displayed on the Alert Status Screen in the What Happened column 4 3 6 Available Alert Classes The DSM250 has several classes of alerts depending on the parameter for which an alert is being configured Low Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value drops below the value in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field High Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value rises
147. cnnocacnnonacoconanononarononanos 88 Figure 77 DSM150 DSM250 Label Configuration ccccccccsecceceeeeeceeeeececeseesessaeeessaeeesseeeesaaeees 88 Figure 78 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Gelechon 89 Figure 79 DST100 Configuration Screen ccccoccnccnncnccnocnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnononnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnrnnonnrnnnnnnnennnnncnanens 90 Figure 80 DST100 Advanced Configuration Screen coooccnccconcnncconcnnnnnnnnncnnnnononnnnnncnnannnnnnnnrnnnnanennnns 90 Figure 81 Calibrating the DSM250 for DST100 Speed through Water 91 Figure 82 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset ina DGIn00 92 Figure 83 Resetting the DST100 Trip Distance og 93 Figure 84 DST110 Configuration Screen sssri a aa a aae aaia 94 Figure 85 DST110 Advanced Configuration Screen oocccccconconoconcncncnncnnoncncononnnnononnanoncnnanenconanennnns 94 Figure 86 DST110 NMEA 20009 PGN Enable Disable Screen ccccccnnccccccnncconooonccnnnoronconncnnnonono 95 Figure 87 Calibrating the DST110 Speed arrrnrarrrrrannerrnnrernanrrrnnnrnvnnnrnrnnnennannrnransennansennassnnnnsnnnnnee 96 Figure 88 DST110 Water Temperature Calibration Screen occooncccconcnccncnnccncnnonncononarononannnnnarnnnnnoos 97 Figure 89 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset ina DI 97 Figure 90 Resetting the DST110 Trip Distance og 98 Figure 91 EMS100 Configuration Screen First Gcreen REENEN EEN 99 Figure 92 EMS100 Configuration Screen Se
148. cond Gcreen 99 Figure 93 FFM 100 GCOnnguratiOn ocre EE 104 Figure 94 FFM 100 Advanced Configura ciiinnianadiaia iia iii 104 Page xii Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 95 FFM100 NMEA PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 106 Figure 96 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Differential Mode 107 Figure 97 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Differential Mode 107 Figure 98 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 109 Figure 99 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 109 Figure 100 FFM100 Channel 1 Configuration Screen Differential Model 112 Figure 101 FFM100 Channel 1 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 113 Figure 102 FFM100 Channel 1 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode EE 113 Figure 103 FPM100 Configuration Gcreen 115 Figure 104 FPM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 116 Figure 105 FPM100 NMEA 20008 PGN Enable Disable Green 116 Figure 106 FPM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Tank Model 117 Figure 107 FPM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Tank Model 118 Figure 108 FPM100 Tank Levels Calibration Menu 119 Figure 109 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation n00nnnnnnannoennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnrnnnrnnnenne 120 Foue NE Empty Level aD ON essa deca 120
149. connected to Channel 0 of the FFM100 is installed such that the direction of the fuel flow is in the same direction as the arrow Page 104 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron on the fuel flow sensor label Change this entry to Reverse Installation if the direction of the fuel flow is in the opposite direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 13 1 3 Channel 1 Installation Leave this entry at the default value of Normal Installation if the flow sensor connected to Channel 1 of the FFM100 is installed such that the direction of the fuel flow is in the same direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label Change this entry to Reverse Installation if the direction of the fuel flow is in the opposite direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 13 1 4 Channel 0 Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of Yes for the FFM100 to output negative fuel flow values if the direction of fuel flow for the Channel 0 sensor is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label Set this entry to No to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the direction of fuel flow is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 13 1 5 Channel 1 Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of Yes for the FFM100 to output negative fuel flow values if the direction of fuel flow for the Channel 0 sensor is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow senso
150. cription Capt Bob_ Figure 311 Editing the Name of a Phone Book Entry see Section 3 3 4 for details on editing the phone book entry name After you have entered the name you will be given the opportunity to send a test message as shown in Figure 312 below Page 262 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Setup SMS Text Phone Book First Mate Engineer Sweden mobile number French Phone Number Figure 312 SMS Phone Book Test Message Popup Press Yes to send a test message or press No to skip sending the test message You will be returned to the SMS Text Phone Book screen Once you have created all of the phone book entries you need press the Back key to exit the SMS Text Phone Book screen 8 8 Advanced Configuration The Advanced Parameters of the Alert System may be configured through this Screen Enter the screen though the Alert Setup menu and select the Advanced Configuration option Alert Setup Advanced Configuration WO Wee i Enable Flashing Screen Disable Figure 313 Advanced Configuration The following parameters may be set Revision 1 6 2 Page 263 DSM250 User s Manual 8 8 1 Remote Alert Audible lf Remote Alerts are enabled and an active alert is received from another device on the bus the DSM250 will respond by adding the Alert to its list of Active Alerts Section 8 1 and sounding the internal speaker The sounding of the
151. d AT amp T 19999999999 Figure 262 SMS Status Display 7 15 Time hh mm The Time hm mm display shows a time value in an hours and minutes format Figure 263 below shows an example of this type of display Local Time Figure 263 Time hh mm Display 7 16 Time hh mm ss The Time hm mm ss display shows a time value in an hours minutes and seconds format Figure 264 below shows an example of this type of display Revision 1 6 2 Page 225 DSM250 User s Manual Local Time 23 29 14 hh mm ss Figure 264 Time hh mm ss Display 7 17VDR Status The VDR Status display shows the status of a VDR100 Vessel Data Recorder on the network The normal state for the VDR is Recording Please refer to the VDR100 User s Manual for other status that could be displayed on the VDR Status display Figure 265 below shows an example of this type of display Recording Figure 265 VDR Status Display 7 18Weather Display The DSM250 supports a single screen weather display that shows a wide variety of weather related information A screen shot of the weather display appears in Figure 266 below Page 226 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 19 22 41 02 11 2011 86 F Cat 29 95 l 80 F er as 80 F F 54 er F 30 00 hside Hum inside Dew Paint en First O Aih ih ta Br 0 12 06 06 Baro meter C Sunrise 23 17 Figure 266 Weather Display The weather display shows the following information Wind
152. d 0 Apparent Direction Figure 29 Selecting the Data Category Once you select the category press the Enter key EW to accept this category at which time the highlight will move to the data type field where you can display the particular data type from the selected category to be displayed as shown in Figure 30 Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Wind ET AA Type Numeric Instance Title Default Wind ei Apparent Direction Figure 30 Selecting the Data to be displayed 5 2 6 4 1 Type Once you have selected the particular data item to be displayed you may select the type of data display to be used for that data item The available display types vary depending upon the selected data item but may include any of the following see Section 7 for descriptions of the available display types e Anchor Watch See Section 7 1 on page 212 Revision 1 6 2 Page 41 DSM250 User s Manual Bar Graph see Section 7 2 on page 213 Compass Rose see Section 7 3 on page 213 Date see Section 7 4 on page 215 Date Time see Section 7 5 on page 215 Gauge see Section 7 4 on page 215 GPS Status see Section 7 7 on page 21 7 Half Gauge see Section 7 8 on page 218 Indicator Light See Section 7 9 on page 218 Numeric see Section 7 8 on page 218 Numeric Precision see Section 7 11 on page 222 Rolling Road
153. d Decrease keys until the highlighted rudder angle value is at the measured value and then press Enter to accept the value and store it within the RAA100 Figure 155 shows a screenshot of the starboard rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 11 Turn wheel hard over to starboard 12 Use arrow keys to select rudder angle 13 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at hard over port position 14 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 155 RAA100 Starboard Rudder Angle Calibration Page 152 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron The second step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process is to turn the wheel so that the rudder is centered as much as possible Next press Enter to accept the value and store it within the RAA100 Figure 156 shows a screenshot of the center rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 1 Center the rudder 12 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at center position 13 Press lt Abort gt to cancel c
154. d specified and each time the value changes Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 21 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 21 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the RIM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the RIM100 See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 159 DSM250 User s Manual 6 21 3 Instance From here the instance used in the data message may be set 6 21 4 Channel Configuration To configure an individual channel use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then press Enter The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HN SW D4 Maretron RIM 100 140002 10 111 Channel 1 Mode Enable ETB Anchor Winch Reset Counter Reset Timer Figure 166 RIM100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 21 4 1 Mode Each Channel may be enabled or disabled Valid Modes are e Disable the channel is not being used e Enable the channel is being used select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 21 4 2 Label A label may be assigned to a channel as an aid to identifying the channel over the network Typically this label will describe
155. d to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Figure 193 TLA100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 25 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 178 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 25 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 25 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The TLA100 Tank Level Adapter transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 127505 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 194 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HUT SW 13 Haretron TLA 10 209711 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN
156. d to signal you when a parameter value rises above a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the freezer temperature rises above 0 C 8 3 7 1 1 Description A high alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below Revision 1 6 2 Page 239 DSM250 User s Manual High Alert Parameters High Alert Mu Inactive transitions to the Active state after Mum Active Set Delay seconds See Awaiting Cancel Input Signal rises above High Alert SetPoint High Alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state after a Clear Delay seconds Ki un 5 High Alert o Set Point High Alert se Deny Clear Point Operator Cancels Alert Input Signal falls e below High Alert Clear Delay Clear Point Time Figure 284 High Alert Parameters A high alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has risen above the High Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal rises above the High Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts As an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seconds will eliminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the High Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals falls be
157. dding a New Alert Pressing Enter brings up the Alert Edit Screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 237 DSM250 User s Manual ik spe EE IER SA Enable Alert Type Alarm Priority Trigger Source Type d Data Instance Description Location d Trigger Configuration Trigger Type d Re trigger Period 0 00 min sec Figure 283 Part of the Alert Edit Screen This allows the entry of all the alert parameters which can vary depending on the type of alert chosen These parameters are 8 3 1 Enable Disable Control This allows individual alerts to be enabled or disabled The decision to disable an Alert must be made very carefully as it nullifies the purpose for having alerts The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 2 Alert Type This allows the selection of the type of Alert see paragraph 4 3 1 The options here are e Alarm e Warning The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 3 Priority Each Alarm has a unique priority ranging from 0 highest priority to 3999 lowest priority Each Warning has a unique priority in the same range however the entire set of Warning Priorities is considered lower than the Alarm Priorities No two Alarms Warnings may have the same priorities and when scrolling through the priorities numbers that are already in use will be omitted from the list The desired
158. de Radius Alert Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Outside Radius Alert Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3 00 Nautical Miles Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 2 50 Nautical Miles Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Latitude 33 34 080 N Longitude 112 06 530 W Get Current Position Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Figure 293 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Outside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Page 248
159. ding 1 Ground Wind e Hum Outside 73 F LO hside MO hside Ah 16H 12h Eh oe 5 45 Bare maik Sunrise Figure 278 Alert Display The number of Alerts with pending operator actions is shown in the top right corner This will be colored red if the highest pending Alert is an Alarm and yellow if it is a Warning The description of the active Alert with the highest priority is shown at the bottom left of the screen This will be colored red if itis an Alarm and yellow if it is a Warning In addition the state of the alert 0 will be shown as follows Active The enclosing box will flash between a solid red or yellow and white Accepted The enclosing box will be a solid red or yellow Awaiting Cancel The enclosing box will be outlined in red or yellow as shown in Figure 278 8 1 1 Alert Status Screen The list of Active Alerts is displayed in tabular form on the Alert Status Screen This Screen may be displayed by selecting the Alert Status option from the Main Menu Revision 1 6 2 Page 235 DSM250 User s Manual Alert s Pending 1 Source Pr Inactive Local 3 08107 10 46 49 Local 5 Figure 279 Alert Status Screen 8 2 Accepting or Cancelling an Alert Active Alerts may be accepted 4 3 2 by the operator to indicate that the operator has taken responsibility for the Alert Alerts that have been triggered and the cause removed without being accepted by a user must be cleared 8 2 1 From a Favor
160. dress to N2KView clients in order to allow them to connect to the IPG100 If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 17 7 Subnet Mask This is a mask used to divide an IP Address into subnets Basically it tells the computer how much of the IP Address defines the network and how much may be used by computers on the network For most networks the first three parts of the IP address define the network i e every computer on the network must have the same values and the last part defines the computer e every computer on the network must have a different value Where the value 255 appears in the subnet mask the values define the network and must be the same The most common value Is 255 255 255 0 If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 17 8 Default Gateway This is the IP address of the router If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 17 9 Default DNS This is the IP address of a computer on the Internet that can identify and locate computer systems and resources on the internet In most cases this should no
161. ds on the battery are switching on and off frequently the battery time remaining value calculated by the DCM100 can vary significantly You may change the time over which current readings are averaged by changing this parameter anywhere in the range of 1 second to 32 minutes 6 6 3 13 Zero Current Threshold The current sensor reading can drift slightly at zero current depending on temperature Over a long period of time this can cause the DCM100 to calculate that a battery is discharging slowly even though it is not The Zero Current Threshold parameter indicates a reading from the current sensor below which no current is considered to be flowing into or out of the battery 6 6 4 Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 6 5 Label A label may be assigned to the DCM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the battery or device which the DCM100 is monitoring See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 75 DSM250 User s Manual 6 7 Maretron DCR100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron DCR100 DC Relay device This section describes the configuration of the Maretron DCR100 firmware version 1 1 1 The main DCR100 configuration screen is shown below Configuration
162. dvance to the next calibration point Figure 111 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Page 120 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 8 2 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 1E 34567390100940 Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 111 Intermediate Level Calibration Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 112 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 11 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 12345 67 8 ann BUY EE Pow
163. e DHCP parameter to No and manually configure the IP Address Section 6 17 6 Subnet Mask Section 6 17 7 Default Gateway Section 6 17 8 Default DNS Section 6 17 9 6 31 5 IP Address This parameter is the IP Internet Protocol address used by the VDR100 You will need to specify this address to N2KExtractor clients in order to allow them to connect to the VDR100 If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 31 6 Subnet Mask This is a mask used to divide an IP Address into subnets Basically it tells the computer how much of the IP Address defines the network and how much may be used by computers on the network For most networks the first three parts of the IP address define the network i e every computer on the Revision 1 6 2 Page 203 DSM250 User s Manual network must have the same values and the last part defines the computer e every computer on the network must have a different value Where the value 255 appears in the subnet mask the values define the network and must be the same The most common value is 255 255 255 0 If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 31 7 Default Gateway This is the IP address of the rou
164. e 58 a ACI eco E 59 Figure 44 ACM100 Advanced Configuration Screen ccooccncccccnccccnnccnnnnononnnonnononarononarnnnnnnnononnnononess 59 Figure 45 ACM100 NMEA 20009 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 61 Figure 46 Reset Total Energy Recorded Confirmation Screen ccccocccccccncccncnnccocononannnonannnnoncncnonons 63 Revision 1 6 2 Page xi DSM250 User s Manual Figure 47 ALM100 Configuration Gcreen 64 Figure 48 ALM100 Advanced Configuration Screen cccoccncccccncccccnccnncnonononononnnonarononarnnonannononcnononens 64 Figure 49 ALM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Green 65 Figure 50 CLM100 Configuration Gcreen A R REEE EE EA E 67 Figure 51 CLM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 67 Figure 52 CLM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen occccccnnocococnnoconoooncconononnnonanonononoo 68 Figure 53 CLM100 Channel Configuration SCree n occccoccncccccnccncnnccnnnnononnnonacnnonarononannnonnnnononcnonanens 69 Figure 54 DGM100 Coniigur tlon Scree BEE 70 Figure 55 DCM100 Advanced Configuration Screen ccooccnccoccncccncncconcnonononononnnonarnnonarnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnens 71 Figure 56 DCM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 72 Figure 57 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Confirmation Screen oooccccoccccconoccncnnnncnconanennnos 73 Figure 58 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Complete Screen ooocccooccccccnoccnconnccncnnnnencnnanennnns 73 Figure 59 DGR1
165. e J1939 Source Address see Section 6 18 4 identifies the air conditioner or icemaker on the CAN network the AC Icemaker Instance identifies the air conditioner or icemaker to the NMEA2000 network Revision 1 6 2 Page 145 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW A8 Maretron JK 120008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine d Transmission ACIlcemaker G J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JE S None Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 145 J2K100 NMEA2000 AC Icemaker Instance Configuration Use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value you wish and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 18 6 J1939 Source Address Configuration A J1939 engine genset and transmission has its own source address on the J1939 network which is different from NMEA 2000 addresses The J2K100 is capable of serving as a gateway between a single J1939 engine genset or a single transmission and the NMEA 2000 network This setting identifies the J1939 source address of the engine genset and a transmission for which the J2K100 will serve as a gateway For air conditioners or icemakers the J1939 source address refers to the source address of the air conditioner or icemaker on the AC Icemaker CAN network Configur
166. e TMP100 Temperature Module transmits a number of the NUEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For reasons of compatibility with older NMEA2000 devices some of these PGNs are redundant disabling these PGNs will reduce the amount of traffic on the NMEA20009 bus Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 225 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 29 Maretron TMP 00 180009 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 10310 Environmental Of 10811 Environmental Parameters On THOT 8 Temperature On 10823 Temperature High Range Off Figure 225 TMP100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 29 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 29 2 Channel Configuration Individual channels may be configured by using the Scroll Up and Sc
167. e also generates these PGNs 6 32 1 5 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 32 1 6 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The WS0100 Ultrasonic Wind and Weather Station transmits a number of NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For the vast majority of installations the factory setting is appropriate but if it becomes necessary to disable one of the transmitted messages Revision 1 6 2 Page 205 DSM250 User s Manual from the WS0100 for instance if you have a separate thermometer humidity sensor barometer on the network it is possible to do so with the DSM250 Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 234 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW SA Maretron WSOW0 100421 20 201 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disa ble EE Wind Data On BOW Environmental Parameters On 10311 Environmental Parameters On TOT Temperature On 10313 Humidity On TOY Actual Pressure On Figure 234 WSO100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the t
168. e bottom of the keel The display will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth of the water as seen by the depth transducer showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 23 Airmar DST A9 PI H 127 i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset fu Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 37 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in an Airmar Depth Transducer Revision 1 6 2 Page 55 DSM250 User s Manual With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys E or Y Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually programs the offset value into the transducer such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 1 10 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within a
169. e here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 10 2 Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All STW readings for the particular DST100 indicated by the SN are multiplied by this number to arrive at the displayed number You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key EY with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up P or Scroll Down EY keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 1 such that all subsequent STW readings are no longer adjusted before displaying by the DSM250 6 10 3 Speed Calibration The DST100 speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the location or placement of the DST100 within the hull The DSM250 can correct for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You calibrate the DSM250 for the DST100 STW by pressing the Enter key EY with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 81 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 81 Calibrating the
170. e keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 11 Water Temperature Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of water temperature gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog water temperature gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e No Gauge select this option if there is no water temperature gauge present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 12 Water Temperature Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of water temperature senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a water temperature sender you must select the correct type of water temperature sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no water temperature sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 13 Water Temperature Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual water temperature senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the water temperature sender in order to allow you to bring the di
171. e tank level sender use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW 3 Maretron TLD 209741 10 114 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 215 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Monitor The first step in custom calibration of the tank level monitor is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank capacity use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then press the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Abort key will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Page 192 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Tank Levels Calibration 1 Use arrow keys to select estimated tank capacity 81 4 Gal 2 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 216 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation The next st
172. ear Delay 0 06 min sec Latitude 33 34 080 N Longitude 112 06 530 W Get Current Position Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Figure 294 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert Alert Set Point If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Inside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become inactive Revision 1 6 2 Page 249 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Inside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the refere
173. ecorded Maretron Annunciator ALM100 set the data instance number and the label Test the alarm Maretron Current Loop Monitor CLM100 set the channel operating mode set transducer characteristics and set damping Maretron Direct Current Monitor DCM100 set the battery type and calibrate the current sensor zero offset Maretron Direct Current Relay Module DCR100 set the operating mode of each channel lock switches set power up state and control state of switches Maretron Monochrome Display DSM200 allows configuration of other DSM200s on the network Maretron Color Display DSM150 DSM250 allows configuration of other DSM150s and DSM250s on network Maretron Depth Speed Temp Transducer DST100 set transducer offset zero trip distance log Maretron Depth Speed Temp Transducer DST110 reset trip log set depth offset speed calibration and temperature offset Maretron Engine Monitoring System EMS100 set the gauge types for boost pressure drive trim oil pressure and water temperature Preset the engine hours Maretron Fuel Flow Monitor FFM100 Set operating mode channel direction K factor temperature coefficient Maretron Fluid Pressure Monitor FPM100 set the operating mode of each channel perform tank levels calibration and set pressure sender characteristics Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS100 enable and disable WAAS functionality set the GPS mode program the ele
174. ed Foreground Color Set 7 Black Background Blue Foreground Color Set 8 Black Background Green Foreground Choosing the Color Setup menu item from the main Display Settings menu takes you to the screen shown in Figure 19 Page 34 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Display Settings Color Setup Color Set 1 Color Set 2 Color Set 3 Color Set 4 Color Set ei Color Set Color Set 7 Color Set e Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Up Figure 19 Color Palette Selection Screen Use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down EY keys to move the highlight to the color set that you want to change and then press the Enter key Selecting Color Set 1 takes you to the screen shown in Figure 20 Display Settings Color Setup Color Set 1 IEEE On Inverse Background Off o nl e Tank Fuel 20 Level Blue 100 Figure 20 Color Palette Configuration Screen You can enable or disable Color Set 1 by changing the Color Set to Off This will disable Color Set 1 while changing between color palettes when using a long press of the Lights key when the DSM250 is operating in favorite screens mode Change the Color Set back to On to enable this color palette Notice that Color Set 1 has a white background 100 Red 100 Green and 100 Blue equals white and that the foreground color is black You can adjust the three different colors to achieve different c
175. een 178 Figure 194 TLA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen o occccnccoccncconoooccnccnnoonnnncononnnans 179 Figure 195 Configuring the Tank Capachhy 180 Figure 196 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Gcreen 180 Figure 197 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Adapter cccseeeeeseeeeseeeeeseees 181 Figure 198 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Eetmaton 182 Figure 199 Empty Level Calibration ccoooccccccnnccccnncocononoconncnnncnonononononnnonnnononrononarnnonnnnnnnannnnnns 182 Figure 200 Intermediate Level Calibration oocccccconnococcnconocnnconocnononcnnanonconanonconancnnononcnnnnnnnoss 183 Figure 201 Full Level Calibration ooccccoconcccoconnnnoconcnnoconnonononnononnnonconanonconannnnonancnnonancnnenonnns 183 Figure 202 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen ccccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 184 Figure 203 American Standard Sender Cailraton 184 Figure 204 European Standard Sender Calibration ooonccccconncnconcnnnnonononcnnoncnnononcnnnnoncnnnonanoss 185 Figure 205 Configuring the Tank Number 185 FG Omnia tie Lara Ke 186 Figure 207 Configuring the Operating Mode c occcccoccnccoccncccccncconononononononnnonnnononnnnnnnncnnonnnncnnnnnnnnns 187 Figure 208 Configuring the to Sender GaugeHesistance 187 Figure 209 Configuring the to Sender Gauge Resistance rrnrn
176. en 1 dB and 60 dB This number represents the signal to noise ratio of a satellite s signal as received by the GPS100 Higher numbers indicate a Revision 1 6 2 Page 127 DSM250 User s Manual better quality signal The GPS will exclude satellites with signal to noise ratios lower than the value of this parameter from the position solution 6 15 1 6 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 15 1 7 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The GPS100 transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 122 Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Magnetic Variation Speed Position Rapid Update COG and SOG Rapid Update GNSS Position Data GNSS DOPs SE Power Figure 122 GPS100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by
177. en press Enter 3 4 Settings Lock Mode sometimes it is desirable to lock the settings of the DSM250 in order to keep them from being inadvertently changed The DSM250 has a settings lock mode in which the settings of the DSM250 cannot be changed To enter the lock mode do the following steps Begin with the DSM250 powered off Press and hold the Up and Enter buttons While you are holding these two buttons press and release the Power button Once the DSM250 has powered on and is displaying the warning screen you may release the two buttons you are holding The DSM250 is now in settings lock mode You can verify this by pressing the Enter key to display the main menu You should see only the Alert Status and Favorite Screens Mode menu entries 6 To exit settings lock mode repeat steps 1 4 When you enter the main menu you should again see all menu entries appear SE ov Page 10 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 4 Important Concepts 4 1 Favorite Screens The DSM250 can display many different types of information in many different configurations It is capable of displaying up to four distinct windows on its screen at one time Rather than making you select from among the many types of available information any time you want to change the displayed data the DSM250 has the concept of Favorite Screens A Favorite Screen is a combination of display settings data to display and formats in which to display the da
178. ensor connected to this channel 6 13 5 2 5 Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 13 5 2 6 Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to reset the total volume recorded to zero 6 13 5 2 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter Is 0 6 13 5 2 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 13 5 2 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 5 2 10 Fluid Type Program this parameter to match the type of fluid whose flow is being monitored 6 13 5 2 11 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 a
179. ent remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter 6 6 3 9 Fully Charged Time In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery is fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery current remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter 6 6 3 10 Battery Temperature In order for the DCM100 to properly determine battery capacity and state of charge it must know the temperature of the battery If you are using a TR3K temperature sensor attached to the battery you should set this parameter to Sensor Otherwise if no temperature sensor is available you can set this parameter to the estimated battery temperature between 25 C and 125 C 6 6 3 11 Time Remaining Floor The DCM100 calculates the time given the current being discharged from the battery before the battery becomes discharged By default the DCM100 considers a battery to be discharged when its state of charge reaches the Time Remaining Floor value which is by default set to 50 If you desire to use some other state of charge value for the Time Remaining Floor you may change this parameter to the desired value 6 6 3 12 Time Remaining Averaging Period If loa
180. ep in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 217 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Current Point highlight will advance to the next point Trank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point E 234567890182045 Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 217 Empty Level Calibration Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and advance to the next calibration point Figure
181. er Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 112 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 113 Revision 1 6 2 Page 121 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successtully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Press any key to continue Current Point 123456 7 901T BY phi Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 1 13 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 1 1 1 1 1 2 Rectangular Tank This menu allows calibration of the FPM100 for tanks with a rectangular cross section Empty Tank Depth enter the depth of the fluid when the tank is empty this distance is usually zero Full Tank Depth enter the depth of the fluid when the tank is full this is the distance from the surface of the fluid to the bottom of the tank Fluid Density enter the density of the fluid whose depth is being measured There are preset values for various types of diesel fuels as well as gasoline and water Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW 5 Maretron FP 159999 10 Channel Tank Levels Calibration Rectangular Tank Empty Tank Depth UE Full Tank Depth Mi Fluid Dens
182. er of the Hardware Licensee Key currently plugged into the IPG100 6 17 1 3 4 Platinum Licenses This entry shows the number of platinum licenses in use followed by a slash followed by the total number of platinum licenses 6 17 1 3 5 Basic Licenses This entry shows the number of basic licenses in use followed by a slash followed by the total number of basic licenses 6 17 1 4 Maretron Cloud Services Status This entry shows a window displaying the current status of the connection to Maretron Cloud Services Maretron Technical Support personnel may ask for the information in this window if there is a problem connecting to Maretron Cloud Services Page 138 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Confiquration Figure 137 IPG100 Maretron Cloud Services Status Display 6 17 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the IPG100 device to their factory default state 6 17 2 Device Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies this device Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display The default device label is blank 6 17 3 N2KServer Password Program this parameter with a text password Any connecting N2KView clients must be programmed with the same password in the Connections Settings gt N2KServer Connection gt Password field in the N2KView software The default password is blank 6 17 4 Maretron Clo
183. er on phase B of the bus Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the bus Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus 4 2 2 AC Generator Average Current displays the average current of the AC power on the generator Average Frequency displays the average frequency of the AC power on the generator Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the generator Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the generator Total Real Power displays real power output by the generator Total Reactive Power displays reactive power output by the generator Total Apparent Power displays apparent power output by the generator Total Power Factor displays power factor of the generator Total KWH Export displays total energy produced by the generator for the Maretron ACM100 this parameter s value may be reset to zero with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Total KWH Import displays total energy consumed by the generator for the Maretron ACM100 this parameter s value may be reset to zero with
184. ererrrnresnrrsrrenrenne 210 Figure 242 Setting the Outside el El el TEE 210 Figure 243 Setting the Outside Temperature 211 Figure 244 Anchor Watch Display Exvample 212 Figure Bak GrapnDISDIAY PAD E 213 Figure 246 Compass Rose Display Course Up Example oocccoccnccoccnccnccnccnccconncononacononncnnnnacononos 213 Figure 247 Compass Rose North Up Display cooooccccoccncconcncconcnonononononononocononacononnnncnnncnnnnns 214 PIGUIC 249 Dale REENEN 215 Figure 249 Date Time Display Example 0cccccccseececsecsseeseesecsecsseesoeseceeeseeeseusecseessersoeseoesenaes 215 Figure 250 Gauge Display Paper 216 Figure 251 Rudder Angle Gauge Display Evample 216 Flue 252 GPS Status Display BAND EE 217 Figure 253 Mall Gauge Display B ANPE vase 218 Figure 254 Configuration of Indicator Light Display ooccccoccncccnnncconnnononnnonanononacononanononannnnnos 219 Figure 255 Selection of an Individual Indicator Cobt 219 Figure 256 Configuration of an Individual Indicator gt 220 Figure 257 Numeric Display Example n nnannnnnnannennennonnonnnnnnsrnnnrrnrnnnrsnrrrrrnrrenrsrernrrnrennrnnernernrennnn 221 Figure 258 Numeric Precision Display Example occcoccccoccccccnccccncnoncnnnononnnnonnnnonnnnnnnanonnnnonnnnnnnanoss 222 Figure 259 Configuration of Rolling Road Display oocccoccccocncnccnccccnccnononnnnnonononnnnonnnnnnnancnnanoss 223 Figure 260
185. erod 173 6 24 8 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration cccccccceccccseceeceseeeseeeeeseeeeseeesessaeeessaeeesaaees 174 6 24 9 Variation Source Ent 174 6 25 Maretron TLA100 Configuration occccoccncoccnncccnnncnonnnononnnononononncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnenanenoss 178 Ed MMM 178 o e a a E E E E E 179 SE E Tank GAC PP EEE EEEREN N 179 6254 Tank Love Calbi IlO EE 180 6 25 5 Tank Number 185 02 AR AA 185 62957 Operating MOOG casara rro naa eto 186 6 25 8 Gauge Resistance to Gender 187 6 25 9 Gauge Resistance to Gender 187 Revision 1 6 2 Page vil DSM250 User s Manual 6 26 Marettom TEM 100 Ee Late gue Te vasse 189 6 20 1 Advanced CONTGQUIAUON EE 189 SE 190 A A O 190 6264 Tank Levels Calibration EE 191 6 265 EAN dde dd 196 SAP eee ee ne nee een 196 627 Mar tron TLM 150 Conga Te WEE 196 6 28 Maretron KREE ENEE test bd 196 6 29 Maretron TMP100 Configuration ccccoccncccccncccnnncconnnonononononnnonncnnonncnnnnncnonnnnonnnnnononeness 197 629 1 Advanced COMMOUFANOM DEE 197 6 29 2 Channel Configuration cccccccccccseeceeseeceeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeesseeeesseeesseeeesaeees 198 6295 DEVICE LADE EE 199 6 30 Maketron USB1 00 GOnmiquyratio EE 200 6 30 1 Advanced AN 200 6 30 2 Remote Device SEE AN 201 6 31 Maretron VDR100 Configuration aprann RA E 202 6 3121 AdVanced Configuratio Misco 202 SEEM EE A eo 203 SEN E Ee A 203 A EE 203 A 203 6310 Ee E EEN 203 6 3127 PE
186. es that the channel s function has been set to Pressure Vacuum 6 14 2 2 2 Instance This entry sets the instance number to be used in the Pressure message This entry may be set to ay value between 0 and 252 6 14 2 2 3 Label A label may be assigned to each channel of the FPM100 as an aid to identifying the pressure that is being displayed Typically this label will describe the function or location of the pressure sensor Revision 1 6 2 Page 123 DSM250 User s Manual 6 14 2 2 4 Pressure at 4mA Enter the pressure measured by the pressure sensor when it is outputting a 4mA current this will usually be zero 6 14 2 2 5 Pressure at 20mA Enter the pressure measured by the pressure sensor when it is outputting a 20mA current 6 14 2 2 6 Source In the NMEA20009 PGNs each pressure is associated with a source type Possible values are Water Pressure Atmospheric Pressure Compressed Air Pressure Hydraulic Pressure Steam Pressure User Defined Temperature 129 4144 Use this when none of the above options are suitable 6 14 2 2 7 Data Damping Period If the channel s Function is set to Tank the default data damping period is 16 0 seconds If the channel s Function is set to Pressure Vacuum the default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 15Maretron GPS100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron GPS100 firmware version 2 0 1 Some versions of the GPS100 have a different set of firmware that is
187. es the configuration of the Maretron DCM100 firmware version 1 0 4 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SV Bi Maretron DCH 100 1419905 10 104 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration DC Type Battery Instance 1 Label N2KE DIS Figure 54 DCM100 Configuration Screen Page 70 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 6 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW B4 Haretron DCH 00 410905 10 104 pela Configuration Guest Zenser 2004 or Instance 2 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 55 DCM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 6 1 1 Current Sensor Type Three different current sensors may be attached to the DCM100 Options are e 200A A 200 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA200 S e 400A A 400 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA400 S e 600A A 600 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA600 S Select the required transducer using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6
188. essary for other products which are connected to the NMEA 0183 interface Figure 178 below shows the SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 0183 Settings gt Sentence Rate Selection menu In this menu you can selectively enable and disable the different NMEA 0183 sentences that the SSC200 SSC300 can transmit and you can program the transmission interval for the enabled sentences In the figure you can see that the HDG and ROT sentences will be transmitted every 0 1 second 10 times second the ATT sentence will be transmitted once per second and the HDM and HDT sentences are disabled Page 168 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron The last line in the menu enables you to program the lifetime of the variation data received by the SSC200 SSC300 In Figure 178 you can see that the Variation Time has been programmed to 5 0 seconds This means that if the compass has not received magnetic variation for five seconds it will no longer transmit true heading data as the variation data it has received is now expired On the NMEA2000 side the Heading PGN has separate fields for heading sensor reading and variation The SSC200 SSC300 always has magnetic heading available when variation is not available timeout or invalid the variation field is set to N A The default value of 5 0 seconds should be adequate for the majority of applications but it may need to be increased for variation sources that transmit less frequently Configuration Device Configuration NA Ma
189. etting by pressing the Enter key with the Elevation Mask menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 119 to be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW Swe 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 119 Configuring Satellite Elevation Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for Elevation Mask are between 90 and 90 This number represents the elevation of a satellite above the horizon Satellites with 0 elevation are at the horizon while satellites with 90 elevation are directly overhead The GPS will exclude satellites with an elevation lower than the value of this parameter from the position solution 6 15 1 4 PDOP Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the PDOP Mask on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the PDOP Mask menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 120 to be displayed Page 126 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWT 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS
190. f the water as seen by the DST110 showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 82 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 23 Maretron DET 110 g D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset BO Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 89 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DST110 Revision 1 6 2 Page 97 DSM250 User s Manual With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys or EY Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually programs the offset value into the DST110 such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 11 7 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within a DST110 depth speed temperature transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected
191. figuration ooccccconncncoconcnnoconcnnnnnnnonononcnnnonanonconanenonnnnrnnnnnarinnnnnnnss 148 HL Adanced Connor ato EE 149 bl NNN 150 6 20 3 Rudder Angle CGalbraton 151 020 FIT NNN ee 154 6 20 5 Operating Mode rannnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnsennnnsnennnnsnennnnsrennnnsnennnnseennnnn 155 6 20 6 Gauge Resistance to TEE 156 6 20 7 Gauge Resistance to Gender 156 6 21 Maretron RIM100 Configuration oocccccconnnccconcnnoconcnncnnnnononnaconnonanonnonancnnonnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnoss 158 6 21 1 Advanced CGontfguraton pnn n an pnan hEN EE NANE ERENER 158 A E e EEE 159 SEA EN E ln Le 160 6 21 4 n EKG DE EE 160 6 22 Maretron SIM100 Configuration cccccccseecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesseeeeessaeeeeeseneesesaeeeees 161 622 1 PRON INC COTM de EE 161 622 2 DVICE Ee 162 SLI e 163 6224 NNN sed 163 SE ee de TOO COOU de e EE 164 SE EE nee Been le de EE 164 or AS EE 165 A EEE 166 6 24 Maretron SSC200 SSC300 Configuration occccoccccccnccccnnnccnnonncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonanonnanonnns 167 6 24 1 Advanced CGonfguraton 167 6 24 2 Installation Offset Calibration oooocccconcnccccnncccnnncconnnonononononononanononacnnnnacnnonanncnnnons 170 6 24 3 Invertea INSTA ATION ENN EE 171 0244 en 172 6 24 5 Magnetic Deviation Calibration ccccccccccseececeeececeeeeeceeeeeseecesseeeesseeeetsaeeesseeeesaeees 172 6 24 0 Magneto DevialOn CHE 173 6 24 7 Rate of Turn Damping H
192. figuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW 29 Maretron IPG 100 20002 10 10 69 Advanced Configuration N2KServer Information Client List N2KServer Version 3 2 20110208 License Key Number 500 Platinum Licenses 2120 Basic Licenses 010 Figure 135 IPG100 N2KServer Information Screen 6 17 1 3 1 Client List For each N2KView client connected to the IPG100 this entry displays the following information e Lic License this field indicates the type of N2KView license in use by the client It will indicate P for a platinum license and B for a basic license e Inst Instance this field indicates the instance number used by this N2KView client e IP Address this field indicates the IP address of the N2KView client If it is followed by the letter E this indicates that the connection is encrypted e Label this field indicates the label assigned to the N2KView client Revision 1 6 2 Page 137 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW 29 Maretron IPG 100 120002 10 Advanced Configuration N2KServer Information Client List Lic Inst IP Address Label PO JURE Helm P 21 000141E Lab Mini 01 Figure 136 IPG100 Client List Display 6 17 1 3 2 N2KServer Version This entry shows the version number of the N2KServer software currently running on the IPG100 6 17 1 3 3 License Key Number This entry shows the serial numb
193. firmation Gcreen 154 Figure 159 RAA100 Setting the Rudder Number 155 Figure 160 RAA100 Setting the Operating Mode 155 Figure 161 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance occcooncccconocccconoccnconnncnnnnnncnnonnncoss 156 Figure 162 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Hesisiance rren 157 Figure 163 RIM100 Configuration Gcreen n a EEN 158 Figure 164 RIM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 158 Figure 165 RIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen o cccccccocccccnocoocnoconococanocononanans 159 Figure 166 RIM100 Channel Configuration Screen ccccooccnnccnncnnccnncnnconannncononcnnononcnnnnoncnnnnoncnnnnnnnoss 160 Figure 167 SIM100 Configuration Gcreen iii a 161 Figure 168 SIM100 Advanced Configuration Screen cccccssececceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeseaueeessaseessanseess 161 Figure 169 SIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen oooooccccnccoccccconococcnconoconcnnnononnnnos 162 Figure 170 SIM100 Channel Configuration Gcreen 163 Figure 171 SMS100 Configuration Screen EEN 164 Figure 172 SMS100 Advanced Configuration Menu 164 Figure 173 SMS100 NMEA 20009 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 165 Figure 174 SMSTOD TEST SAUEN BE 166 Figure 175 SSC200 SSC300 Configuration Gcreen 167 Figure 176 SSC200 SSC300 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 167 Figure 177 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 0183 Settings Gcreen 168 Figure 178 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 0183 Sentence
194. followed by the Enter key 6 11 2 Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All measured STW readings are multiplied by this number before being transmitted over the NMEA 20009 network You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key 3 with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 1 such that all subsequent measured STW readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network Revision 1 6 2 Page 95 DSM250 User s Manual 6 11 3 Speed Calibration The DST110 speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the location or placement of the DST110 within the hull The DST110 can be corrected for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You calibrate the DST110 STW by pressing the Enter key with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 81 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 87 Calibrating the DST110 Speed The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 81 indicates the STW as measured by the DST110 which can be changed to the transmitted STW by foll
195. g the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate which is once every 15 seconds and each time the value changes e 1s 15s The status message will be transmitted at the period specified and each time the value changes select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 22 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 22 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the SIM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the SIM100 See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 162 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 22 3 Instance From here the instance used in the data message may be set 6 22 4 Channel Configuration To configure an individual channel use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then press Enter The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SWE DO Maretron 5114100 1139099 10 1141 Channel 1 IT DH End Of Line Resistor Label Eng Rm Smoke Det Reset Counter Reset Timer Figure 170 SIM100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 22 4 1 Mode To be able to detect broken con
196. g the specification of the pressure transducer being used 6 14 2 1 5 Tank Capacity In addition to indicating the fluid level within a tank the FPM100 also has the ability to be configured or programmed with the attached tank s capacity This way you will be able to view the tank s capacity as well as the amount of liquid remaining anywhere on the vessel where there is an NMEA 2000 compatible display 6 14 2 1 6 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the FPM100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know the geometry of the tank There are two methods of calibrating an FPM100 channel in Tank mode Page 118 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks also most accurate in any case but requires more effort e Rectangular Tank By inputting some dimensions of a rectangular tank the FPM100 is able to interpolate the volume of liquid from the bottom of the tank to the surface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW 58 Maretron FPM 0 16500999 10 1031 Channel eil Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 108 FPM100 Tank Levels Calibration Menu 1 1 1 1 1 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current
197. gital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Valid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading Select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 14 Preset Engine Hours The EMS100 reports engine hours based on how long the EMS100 has been powered from the engine The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with an engine hours reading of 0 hours If you are installing the EMS100 on an engine that has been in service or if you have overhauled an engine you can use this setting to preset the engine hours reading to the desired value Valid options are e Q 99999 hours Select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key Page 102 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 12 15 Tachometer Flywheel Teeth The EMS100 needs to know the number of flywheel teeth on the engine or the number of alternator pulses per revolution in order to correctly calculate engine RPM Use this setting to program the EMS100 with the number of flywheel teeth or alternator pulses per revolution for the engine to which the EMS100 is connected Valid options are e 0 400 pulses per revolution Select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key Revision 1 6 2 Page 103 DSM250 User s Manual 6 13Maretron FFM100 Configuration The DSM250 is ca
198. gs from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display abel Test Remote Device Selection Figure 76 DSM150 DSM250all settings from local display 6 9 8 Label The Label of the DSM150 DSM250 is used by the Alert System to identify the source of an alert Here the label can be changed using the method described in section 3 3 4 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW T Maretron DSM20 100178 10 13 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label IESI Remote Device Selection Figure 77 DSM150 DSM250 Label Configuration 6 9 9 Remote Device Selection Page 88 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 17 Maretron DSM250 1300178 10 13 Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SH Stat Disp 21 Maretron GPS 10 211 OnL On Maretron DSM250 209901 Off On 8A Maretron WSO 10 17200121 Onl On 01 Maretron USB 100 160288 Onl On 02 Maretron DST 10 5548 Onl On Maretron DSM250 10990 Ofl On 08 Maretron USB 100 LT On Scroll Up Figure 78 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Power Revision 1 6 2 Page 89 DSM250 User s Manual 6 10
199. gure 219 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value A screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 220 Page 194 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successtully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Press any key to continue Current Point 1234567 amp 9DnNPRBYSE Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 220 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 26 4 2 Rectangular Tank If you have a rectangular tank and you know the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Rectangular Tank menu item Figure 221 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over this menu item and then press the Enter key 9 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW T3 Maretron TLM 19 2907151 10 114 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 221 Rectangular Tank Selection The following screen will be displayed Revision 1 6 2 Page 195 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 13 Maretron TLM 10 07151 10 114 Tank Levels Calibr
200. h an indicator light display that emulates a status light on a control panel The display may be set up in several different configurations e Single Indicator Light this creates a single indicator light e 2 rows this creates four rows of single indicator lights e 3 rows this creates three rows of single indicator lights e 4 rows this creates four rows of single indicator lights e 2 rows 2 columns this creates two rows by two columns of a single indicator light Figure 274 below shows a Favorite Screens Setup screen with a single window configured with the 4 rows configuration Page 218 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Indicator Status aa A rows Figure 254 Configuration of Indicator Light Display The maximum number of indicator lignts you can have on a single screen is 16 the 4 Quarters format with all four windows set to use the 4 rows or 2 rows 2 column indicator light configurations In order to configure the individual indicator lights press the Enter key with the selected type highlighted to display a menu with entries for each indicator light in the window being configured as shown in Figure 275 below Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Windows 1 ENG ROOM HATCH Indicator Indicator ei AFT BILGE Indicator 2 Indicator 3 ENG R
201. h the rolling road selected When the rolling road is selected the displayed navigation data the Type submenu changes to four em submenus The rolling road display can show numerical displays of four navigation related data items in addition to the graphical display of boat position and progress towards the desired waypoint Page 222 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Favorite Screens Setup Favorite ei Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Navigation Rolling Road META CoG Item 1 50G Item 2 ETA Item 3 DTW Power Figure 259 Configuration of Rolling Road Display The following data items may be displayed on the rolling road display COG Course Over Ground SOG Speed Over Ground BTW Bearing to Waypoint DTW Distance to Waypoint VMG Velocity Made Good ETA Estimated Time of Arrival TTG Time to Go XTE Cross Track Error Set Drift BOD Bearing Origin to Destination HDG Heading Figure 260 below shows a rolling road display The navigation parameters that have been selected are COG SOG ETA and TTG On the navigation highway itself the waypoint name if available is displayed on the upper left and the waypoint number if available is displayed on the upper right The dashed vertical line along the center of the highway represents the current leg of the route The distance of the boat to the left or the right of the l
202. h you wish to send the message into the Phone Number field then enter the text of the message to be sent into the Message field and finally scroll to the Send field and press the Enter key The text in the Message field will be sent to the telephone number in the Phone Number field The bottom section of the screen displays the SMS text messages most recently received by the SMS100 You can test SMS100 message reception by using a cellular telephone to send a SMS text message to the telephone number of the SMS100 and then watching for the message to appear on this section of the screen within a few seconds to a minute or longer depending on the cellular network Page 166 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 24Maretron SSC200 SSC300 Configuration This section describes the configuration of the Maretron SSC200 firmware version 5 0 3 and SSC300 firmware version 1 0 Nine configurable parameters for the Maretron SSC200 55C300 solid state compass may be configured using the Maretron DSM250 display The Maretron SSC200 SSC300 configuration menu can be seen in Figure 175 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration nstallation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibrati
203. he GPS100 to discard all position and satellite data and compute a position fix Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine PS Mode Auto Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Power Figure 124 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS100 6 15 3 GPS Mode Setting The DSM250 is capable of setting the minimum operating mode on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the GPS Mode menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 125 to be displayed Revision 1 6 2 Page 129 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine GPS Mode ETT Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Power Figure 125 Configuring GPS Operating Mode on a GPS100 The allowable options for GPS Mode are 1D which allows the GPS to report data when only a one dimensional fix time only or better is obtained 2D which allows the GPS to report data only when a two dimensional fix or better is obtained 3D which allows the GPS to report data only when a three dimensional fix or better is obtained or Auto default which allows the GPS to report any available data regardless of the quality
204. he top left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen Half Left Right two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the left half of the screen and the second occupying the right half of the screen Half Top Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top half of the screen and the second occupying the bottom half of the screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 39 DSM250 User s Manual e 2 Qtrs Half Bottom three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the upper left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the bottom half of the screen e Half Top 2 Qtrs three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top of the screen the second occupying the lower left hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen e Four Quarters four parameters will be displayed the first occupying the upper left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen the third occupying the lower left hand corner of the screen and the fourth occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 1 Ei Favorite Mode Auto Manual ln Format ENTES Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Fuel Man
205. he transducer offset is not taken into account 4 2 7 Electrical Resistance displays electrical resistance Page 14 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 4 2 8 Elec Distribution The DSM250 supports control of the DCR100 Carling OctoPlex AC and DC Boxes and other electrical distribution devices that utilize NMEA Command of the 127501 Binary Switch Status message for controlling loads Switch Breaker controls the ON OFF state of a switch or circuit breaker Breaker Current displays current through a switch or circuit breaker Hardware OFF Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the OFF state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ON Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the ON state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ERROR Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR 100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the ERROR state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware OFF Timer displays the value of a hardware
206. heir factory default state 6 20 2 Label A label may be assigned to the RAA100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the rudder to which the RAA100 is connected e g Port Rudder Page 150 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label ET Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Figure 152 RAA100 Label Configuration See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 20 3 Rudder Angle Calibration In order for the RAA100 to indicate an accurate rudder angle it must know how the resistance of the resistive rudder angle sender corresponds to the rudder angle The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HUT SWe 60 klaretron RAA W0 1210997 10 145 Rudder Angle Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Figure 153 RAA100 Rudder Angle Calibration Options There are three methods of calibrating the rudder angle sender 6 20 3 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate rudder angle readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go th
207. hen the Operating Mode is set to Two Individual Flow Sensors 6 13 5 1 4 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 5 1 5 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 13 5 1 6 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 112 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 13 5 2 Channel 0 Configuration Menu Two Independent Sensors Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Two Independent Sensors The Channel 0 Two Independent Sensors Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679099 10 1121 Channel 1 FEITE 3 Phase Engine Instance 1 Engine Label STED ENG K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 05 Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User
208. hould be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buitons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 6 Current Transformer C If you notice that the power measurements of phase C are negative when they should be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Page 60 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buitons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 7 Damping Period Power If you feel that the monitored Power parameters are changing too quickly or too slowly on the display you can adjust the damping that is applied to the output readings by adjusting this parameter The default damping period is 5 seconds You may change it to a value in the range of 0 2 seconds to 10 seconds Use the Increase and Decrease butions
209. iator is active on the NMEA20009 bus and the Annunciator has been given a label the label will be displayed in parenthesis alongside the instance number Note the DSM250 is limited to working with annunciators with data instance numbers in the range 0 15 Alert Detail Remote Annunciator s Instance Tone TE Enable 11 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 299 Remote Annunciator Enable Disable To enable a specific Annunciator use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to position the cursor and then press the Enter button to move to the Tone column The options here are e Enable e Disable Page 254 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again The tone of the Annunciator will be the same as that set in 8 3 9 8 3 11 SMS Text Settings For each alert you may select up to three phone numbers from the phone book to send an alert message to For each phone number you may choose to send a message when the alert is triggered when the alert is cleared or both when the alert is triggered and when the alert is cleared After you select this entry and press Enter the screen changes to show the SMS Text Settings screen as shown in Figure 300 below 515550 12 First Mate 11955517 1 Engineer Restore SMS Settings Factory Defaults Figure 300 SMS Text
210. ically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Revision 1 6 2 Page 115 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW 5 Maretron FPH SW 1659099 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance EA Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 104 FPM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 14 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 14 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 14 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The FPM100 Fluid Pressure Module transmits a number of the NMEA20009 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 105 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HUT SW 5 Maretron EDM 100 16590999 10 10 1 Advanced Configuration
211. igure 144 J2K100 NMEA2000 Transmission Instance Configuration oocccconcnconncnnonncnnnnannnnnos 145 Figure 145 J2K100 NMEA2000 AC Icemaker Instance Configuration ooccccoocncconcnnnnncnnonanonnnos 146 Figure 146 J2K100 J1939 Source Address Configuration cccoonccnccncccncononnnnononennnnancnnnnnnnonononnons 146 Figure 147 NBE100 Configuration Gcreen a a a a a ETRA 147 Figure 148 NBE100 Advanced Configuration Screen ooccccccoccnnccnnccnccnocnnconnnnnnononennnnancnnnnnncnnonnnnnss 148 Figure 149 RAALOO Contiguratlon Sree Nennen a e E 149 Figure 150 RAA100 Advanced Configuration Men 149 Figure 151 RAA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen oooccccccccnonoconcconoonnncconanonoconanos 150 Fale 152 ARAATOO Label CO tel EH e E 151 Figure 153 RAA100 Rudder Angle Calibration Options oooncccccncccccnnnccncnnnccnconanencnnnncnconnncnnonnncoss 151 Figure 154 RAA100 Custom Rudder Angle Calibration ooocccccocccncococnnnonononnnnonennnnoncnnonnnnons 152 Figure 155 RAA100 Starboard Rudder Angle Calibration oo ooooncccccononicnnccncnccnncnnanccncconancnnncnnnnos 152 Figure 156 RAA100 Center Rudder Angle Calibration nnsnennnnnnnnnnennnennnnenrnrnernnrnnnnrnsrnrrernrnen 153 Figure 157 RAA100 Port Rudder Angle Calibration ooonccccconcnncconconcnnaconcnnanonconancnconancnnonnncoss 153 Figure 158 RAA100 Custom Rudder Calibration Con
212. immersion in water and can be mounted in either an outdoor location or an indoor location 2 3 Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 has three mounting options which includes surface mounting flush mounting or an optional gimbal mounting Maretron suggests a location at which the display can be viewed from a relatively straight angle and at which the keys are easily pressed 2 3 1 Surface Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 can be directly mounted to any suitable surface as shown in Figure 1 The steps for this type of mounting are as follows 1 Attach the Surface Mount Template see Section 0 to the surface where the DSM250 is to be located a Make sure the template is level by using one of the horizontal lines as a guide b Scotch tape works well for securing the template c The maximum thickness of the mounting material should not exceed 1 using the provided mounting studs thicker surfaces can be accommodated but you will need to purchase longer studs 2 Drill the four mounting holes all the way through the mounting surface at the locations indicated on the Surface Mount Template a Use a 3 16 drill bit 3 Drill or cut a single hole for the electrical connector a Use a 2 hole saw D You will probably want this hole to be large enough for your fingers so that you can connect or disconnect the cable without removing the DSM250 4 Remove the template from the mounting surface 5 Insert the 2 studs into the back of the
213. ine represents the XTE Cross Track Error The angle of the boat relative to the vertical line represents the difference between the boat s COG Course Over Ground and the BTW Bearing to Waypoint The scale of the XTE display can be selected by setting a value for the XTE alarm See Section 5 2 1 Alert Setup Menu on page 29 for details Revision 1 6 2 Page 223 DSM250 User s Manual COG 320 197 ETA 09 52 54 ISOG 85kts TTG 00 06 02 Figure 260 Rolling Road Display 7 13Line Graph The line graph display shows the value of a parameter displayed on the horizontal axis versus time on the vertical axis Figure 261 below shows the line graph display for barometric pressure over a time period of one day The line graph display can show the selected data over a time period of 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 days Line graph displays are supported only for barometric pressure Barometric 31 00 30 50 30 00 29 50 29 00 Oh 24h 18h 12h Gh Inches Mercu Figure 261 Line Graph Display 7 14SMS Status The SMS Status display shows the status of an SMS100 SMS Text Module on the network It will show whether the SMS100 is connected to the cellular network and if it is connect the cellular carrier along with the phone number used by the SMS100 Figure 262 below shows an example of this type of display Page 224 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron SMS 0 Status Connecte
214. ion points are used to calibrate Rudder Angles Calibration Completed Successfully Press any key to continue 4 P revert to old calibration data Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 158 RAA 100 Custom Rudder Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 20 3 2 Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Use the option for rudders using a rudder angle sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms at full port 45 33 ohms at full starboard 45 6 20 3 3 Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm Use this option for rudders using a rudder angle sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms at full port 45 180 ohms at full starboard 45 6 20 4 Rudder Number First the rudder number must be configured For a vessel with a single rudder the number should be set to U For a vessel with two rudders the port rudder should be set to 0 and the starboard rudder should be set to 1 Each rudder must have a rudder number that is different from all other rudders A screenshot of rudder number configuration is shown in Figure 159 below In order to configure the rudder number use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to Rudder Number then press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the rudder number value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to select the desired rudder number Finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store
215. is free from defects in materials or workmanship Purchaser s payment for such product will be refunded Maretron assumes no liability whatsoever for expenses of removing any defective product or part or for installing the repaired product or part or a replacement therefore or for any loss or damage to equipment in connection with which Maretron s products or parts shall be used With respect to products not manufactured by Maretron Maretron s warranty obligation shall in all respects conform to and be limited to the warranty actually extended to Maretron by its supplier The foregoing warranties shall not apply with respect to products subjected to negligence misuse misapplication accident damages by circumstances beyond Maretron s control to improper installation operation maintenance or storage or to other than normal use or service THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Statements made by any person including representatives of Maretron which are inconsistent or in conflict with the terms of this Limited Warranty shall not be binding upon Maretron unless reduced to writing and approved by an officer of Maretron INNO CASE WILL MARETRON BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF USE LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR ANY
216. isplay of fluid pressure Units that may be selected are the following e Pounds Square Inch PSI e kPa e Bar 5 2 7 10 Volume This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all liquid volume related information Units that may be selected are the following e Liters e Imperial Gallons UK Gallons e Gallons US Gallons 5 2 7 11 Time Format This menu item allows you to select whether measurements indicating a time of day are displayed in 12 Hour AM PM format or 24 Hour military format 5 2 7 12 Local Time Offset This menu item allows you to indicate the offset of local time relative to Universal Time Coordinated UTG also known as Greenwich Mean Time or GMT in hours and minutes For instance Eastern Standard Time EST would use an offset value of 5 00 5 2 7 13 Date Format This menu item allows you to select the format of any displayed dates Formats that may be selected are the following MM DD YYYY 01 31 2005 DD MM YYYY 31 01 2005 MMM DD YYYY JAN 31 2005 DD MMM YYYY 31 JAN 2005 Revision 1 6 2 Page 45 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 7 14 Force This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of force Units that may be selected include the following e Newtons e Kilograms e Pounds 5 2 7 15 Mass This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of mass Units that may be selected include the following e Kilograms e Pounds
217. it can be used to configure a remote DSM150 DSM250 to set which NMEA 2000 devices are selected for display on the remote DSM150 DSM250 unit In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration For example a certain compass unit may be selected from several available compasses for display on the remote DSM150 DSM250 The Remote DSM150 DSM250 Device Selection Menu for an example network configuration can be seen in Figure 69 below WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Revision 1 6 2 Page 83 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HUT SW 11 Maretron DSM 1300001 10 1 0 1b 12 Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SHN Stt Disp 80 Maretron WSO CU AOH nL Un 50 Maretron USB 10 160111 OnL On H Maretron DSH250 110000 Ou On 19 Maretron SSL AN 1140437 Onl n d Maretron GPS 1 14022 Onl On Power Figure 69 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be dis
218. itch must remain Off for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain On for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive Revision 1 6 2 Page 245 DSM250 User s Manual 8 3 7 5 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Channel 1 Aft Bilge Pump Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Re trigger Period 1 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuo us Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Power Back Scroll Scroll Up Down Enter Figure 290 Trigger Configuration Off Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Off state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Off for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 6 Trigger Type is Error Alert When monitoring circuit breakers the error alert ca
219. ite Screen The Alert with the highest priority that requires accepting or cancelling is shown at the bottom left of the screen see Figure 278 This Alert may easily be accepted or cancelled without changing screens by pressing the Power button EY 8 2 2 From the Alert Status Screen Alert s Pending 1 Source Pr Inactive Local 3 08107 10 46 49 Local 5 Figure 280 Cancelling an Alert from the Alert Status Screen Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the Alert to be accepted or cancelled and then press the Enter button An Alert Description screen will be displayed with the details of the Alert and the cursor positioned over the Accept Cancel Alert entry Page 236 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Detail Alerts Pending 1 Time 2009 08 07 11 57 19 Status source Local Type Alarm ID Priority 5 02005 Description Motion Location Lobby What s happend Went ACTIVE 26 times Accept Cancel Alert Edit Alert Figure 281 The Alert Detail Screen Pressing the Enter button at this point will Accept or Cancel the Alert 8 3 Adding an Alert Alerts are created by selecting the parameter to be monitored e g Depth and then selecting the type of Alert e g High Alert Start by going to the Add New Alert entry in the Alert Setup Menu Alert Setup Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode Underway Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 282 A
220. ity Diesel Fuel 20 820 Figure 114 Rectangular Tank Calibration 6 14 2 1 7 Tank Number The Tank Number is the Data Instance used in the data message This can be set from 0 to 15 6 14 2 1 8 Tank Type This is set to the type of fluid in the tank Values are Page 122 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 1 Reserved 7 These values may be used when the contents of the tank does not fit into one of the categories above 6 14 2 1 9 Data Damping Period If the channel s Function is set to Tank the default data damping period is 16 0 seconds If the channel s Function is set to Pressure Vacuum the default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 14 2 2 Channel 0 5 Pressure Vacuum This section describes the channel configuration menu when the channel s Function has been set to Pressure Vacuum mode The Channel 0 5 Pressure Vacuum Mode menu is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 3 Maretron FP 1659099 10 10 1 Channel ei METIA Pressure Vacuum Instance 0 Label AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at 4mA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5 0 PSI Source Water Pressure Data Damping Period 3 0s Figure 115 FPM100 Channel Pressure Vacuum Mode Configuration 6 14 2 2 1 Function You can set the channel s Function to Disabled Tank or Pressure Vacuum This section of the manual assum
221. l Down P keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key EY to accept the setting The remote DSM200 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting Page 82 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 9 Maretron DSM150 DSM150 Configuration You can use the DSM250 to configure other remotely located DSM150 and DSM250 units by using the Remote DSM150 DSM250 configuration menu as shown in Figure 68 below This describes the configuration of the Maretron DSM150 DSM250 firmware version 1 4 18 There are three configurable items for the remote DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Copy device selection from local display and Copy favorite settings from local display Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HW SW TY Maretron DSM250 1300178 10 13 opy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power Figure 68 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Configuration Screen 6 9 1 Remote Device Selection A DSM250 un
222. l So HW SW 59 Maretron CLM 100 16009011 10 10 16 Channel ei Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel en Device Label Scroll Up Figure 50 CLM100 Configuration Screen 6 5 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE 59 Maretron CLM MW 16599011 10 10 16 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 2 Installation Description NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 51 CLM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 5 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 5 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was Revision 1 6 2 Page 67 DSM250 User s Manual installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 5 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN E
223. l need to purchase longer studs Cut out an opening as indicated on the Flush Mount Template a Sorry we should have made the flange larger but be very careful not to go outside the indicated cutout area Be on the safe side and cut the hole a little small and rasp or file to fit Remove the template from the mounting surface Revision 1 6 2 Page 3 DSM250 User s Manual 4 Insert the 2 studs into the back of the DSM250 a Make sure the studs are fully inserted into the back of the DSM250 but don t over tighten the studs b Do not use threadlocking compounds containing methacrylate ester such as Loctite Red 271 as they will cause stress cracking of the plastic enclosure 5 Remove the back of the case from the DSM250 a Place your thumbs on top of the studs and your finger along the side of the case and squeeze the back cover off the DSM250 6 Insert the back of the DSM250 through the front side of the cutout 7 Place the back cover on the opposite side of the mounting surface with the mounting holes aligned with the mounting studs and secure with the supplied hardware a Place the flat washer on the stud first followed by the lock washer followed by the knurled nut b Hand tighten the knurled nut Figure 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 2 3 3 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 can be gimbal mounted to any horizontal surface such a counter or ceiling as shown in Figure 3 The optional gimbal mounting
224. lar mode Enter Key changes from favorite screens mode to menu mode In menu mode a legend appears along the bottom of the screen displaying the function of each of the keys The functions differ slightly depending on whether a menu Is being accessed a selection is being made from a list of possible data values or a numeric value is being increased or decreased Revision 1 6 2 Page DSM250 User s Manual 3 3 1 Navigating in a Menu When accessing a menu the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Back Key 3 returns to the next higher level menu If already at the top level menu exits menu mode returns to favorite screens mode Menu levels are indicated with indentation of the text within the menus Scroll Up Key Y changes the currently selected or highlighted menu item from the presently selected one to the one immediately above it If the top menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the bottom menu item Scroll Down Key changes the currently selected or highlighted menu item from the presently selected one to the one immediately below it If the bottom menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the top menu item Enter Key if the currently selected menu item has a submenu opens that submenu If the currently selected menu item has an editable value indicated by a colon
225. larms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display opy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power Figure 71 DSM150 DSM250 Copy device selection from local display After you select this menu item and press Enter the device selection settings from this DSM250 unit will be copied to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit Revision 1 6 2 Page 85 DSM250 User s Manual 6 9 4 Copy display settings from local display Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 17 Maretron DSM20 1300178 10 13 9 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display opy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power Figure 72 DSM150 DSM250 Copy display settings from local display 6 9 5 Copy favorite settings from local display It is also possible to copy the favorite screen settings from one DSM250 to a remote DSM150 DSM250 unit This menu item can be seen selected in Figure 73 below Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HW SW TY Maretron DSM250 1300178 10 13 Advan
226. lays the node address the device is using The Manufacturer column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Status column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Display column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the DSM250 On or that the DSM250 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up B and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The DSM250 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting Page 30 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 5 2 4 Display Settings Menu The display settings menu allows you to change parameters related t
227. lculated using heading course over ground COG and speed over ground SOG True Speed displays the speed of the wind as it would appear to an observer if the vessel was stopped in the water calculated using speed through water STW or speed over ground Page 22 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron SOG depending on the unit setting of the Wind True Vessel Ref Parameter see Section 5 2 7 6 Revision 1 6 2 Page 23 DSM250 User s Manual 4 3 Alerts An alert is a signal to a user that there is either an alarm or warning condition requiring user intervention Alerts are integrated in an NMEA20009 system For each Alert one device acts as a master or Alert Source and monitors a parameter against a preset threshold When the parameter crosses this threshold the Alert is displayed on the Alert Source and an Alert Message is sent out on the NMEA2000 bus to other devices capable of displaying Alerts Optionally an Annunciator message is sent to devices capable of sounding an audio alarm e g the ALM100 Currently the DSM150 DSM250 and the N2KView Vessel Monitoring Software are capable of generating and receiving Alert Messages The Alert may be accepted or cancelled from any capable device in which case an Alert Response Message Is sent to the Alert Source which in turn will turn the Annunciators off and inform the devices on the bus of the new Alert Status The DSM250 can support the definition of up to 40 alerts 4
228. ld be the display of ground relative wind In this case the wind measured by the weather station needs to be combined with the vessel heading course over ground and speed over ground The instance number of the weather station is specified for each control This table provides the instance numbers of the other parameters used in the calculations Display Settings Advanced Configuration Primary Device Selection ETTE Any GPS Any Heading Any Inside Humidity Any Inside Temp Any Navigation Any Outside Humidity Any Outside Temp Any Speed Through Water Any Time Any Figure 15 DSM250 Primary Device Selection 5 2 4 1 3 Refresh Network Information The Device Configuration 5 2 3 1 and Device Selection 5 2 3 2 menus display a list of devices that have been detected on the NMEA2000 bus This list is kept in memory permanently to reduce the overhead of requesting device information each time one of these pages is requested Pressing the Enter key while this selection is highlighted will clear the list of devices It will be necessary to perform this action to remove traces of devices that have been removed from the bus 5 2 4 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the DSM250 device to their factory default state 5 2 4 2 Advanced Information The Advanced Information Page displays information pertaining to the permanent setup and configuration of the DSM250 Page 32 Revision 1
229. le Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 63 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 18 Maretron DCR 100 1110009 20 1113 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 1275014 Binary Switch Bank Status On Pi Switch Bank Control 108265 Switch Indicator Status On 65284 DC Beaker Current On 10824 Annunciator Off Figure 63 DCR100 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 6 7 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 7 2 Device Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 7 3 Instance This field identifies the particular switch bank instance which is transmitted by this DCR100 This instance number is used by display products to select the particular bank of switches to be controlled or monitored 6 7 4 Channel 1 6 Configuration Each channel may be programmed into one of two different operating modes DCR Mode or ALM Mode 6 7 4 1 Channel 41 46 Configuration DCR Mode Page 78 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW OG Maretron DCR 0 1110999 20 1131 Channel 1 Label Operating Mode Normal switch Lock Unlocked Power Up State Previous
230. le to demonstrate all of the DSM250 s capabilities the unit allows the user to setup and configure different screens while in demo mode However in a show room environment and five minutes after the last button push i e the customer has walked away the demo unit the DSM250 will reset itself to the default screens There are others times where it is important that the DSM250 doesn t automatically reset after five minutes to the default screens for example at a boat show where it is desired to show specific screens while running in the demo mode and thus the Boat Show Mode WARNING All data displayed in demo mode is simulated Do not use this data for vessel monitoring or navigation purposes Display Settings Advanced Configuration Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode OMETE Keypad Beep On Label Language English Software Version 1 6 2 3 Figure 21 Setting the Demo Mode 5 2 4 6 Keyboard Beep The DSM250 has an annunciator that can be programmed to beep every time a key is pressed Conversely the keypad beep may be disabled if desired Page 36 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Display Settings Advanced Configuration Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep 1 Label Language English Software Version 1 6 2 3 Scroll Up Figure 22 Setting the Keyboard Beep Option 5 2 4 7 Label Each DSM250 c
231. led but the condition causing the alert is not present If the alert condition becomes true the alert will become an Active Alert An Inactive alert may be disabled which causes it to transition to the Disabled state New alerts are created in the Inactive State Active An Active alert is an alarm or warning where the condition to trigger the alert has been met and is still present and the operator has not accepted the alert An active alert is indicated by a flashing indicator on the Alert Status Screen and by a flashing colored box at the top right of the DSM250 screen This box will be visible on all screens Also annunciators that are programmed to sound when this alert is active will be sounding during this state An active alert can be accepted by the user causing it to become an Accepted Alert or disabled by the user causing it to become a Disabled Alert If the condition causing the alert is rectified the alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state Accepted An Accepted alert is an alarm or warning which was Active and has been accepted by the user A solid indicator on the Alert Status Screen indicates an Accepted alert annunciators are silenced Normally an alert is a serious matter that requires immediate attention and requires a deliberate attempt to remove the condition that caused the alert Sometimes it isn t practical to immediately remove the condition that caused the alert accepting the alert will silence the annun
232. llow these steps to reset the appropriate display 1 Press the Enter key for approximately one second This will place the display into Control mode and one of the controllable items on the screen will be highlighted with a thick border 2 If there is more than one controllable item on the screen you may use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the highlight to the display to be reset 3 Once the display to be reset is selected then press the Power key You will then see a confirmation popup asking whether it is okay to set the Anchor Drop position to the current position If you answer Yes then the Anchor Drop position will be set to the current GPS position 4 To exit the control mode press the Lights key to return to normal operating mode The highlight will disappear Page 48 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 Device Configuration The Device Configuration menu enables you to configure certain types of devices on the NMEA 2000 network Devices that may be configured using the DSM250 include the following Airmar Depth Speed and Temperature Transducers DST800 DT800 P39 P79 B122 51850 ST800 HT200 reset trip log set depth offset speed calibration and temperature offset if applicable Bennett EP 30 Calibrate trim tabs Maretron Alternating Current Monitor ACM100 set circuit type device type instance number and label Reset the total energy r
233. low Rate Tnp Volume Figure 95 FFM100 NMEA PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 13 1 9 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 13 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the FFM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the FFM100 6 13 3 Operating Mode The FFM100 can operate in one of two user selectable operating modes Differential this mode is used for diesel engines that recirculate unused fuel back into the fuel take These engines will have separate supply and return fuel lines Two Independent Sensors the FFM100 can measure flow rates from two independent sources for example a water flow rate on one channel and a gasoline fuel flow rate on another channel 6 13 4 Channel 0 This submenu contains configuration parameters for Channel 0 This menu looks different depending on whether the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Diffe
234. low the High Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed lf the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately transitions to the Awaiting Cancel once the input signal falls below the High Alert Clear Point as shown in the example above e The user accepts the alert in which case it transitions into the Accepted state The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts 8 3 7 1 2 Trigger Configuration Page 240 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Detail Trigger Type EME Re trigger Period 0 00 min sec Alert Set Point Gal hr Alert Set Delay 0 00 min sec Alert Clear Point Gal hr Alert Clear Delay 0 00 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Operating Mode Moored Enable Operating Mode Underway Enable Scroll Up Figure 285 Trigger Configuration High Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the value of the
235. may be assigned to the J2K100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 18 3 NMEA 2000 Instance Engine This entry allows the engine to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each engine on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other engines on the network The NMEA2000 Engine Instance menu item allows you to configure the engine instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with engine related NMEA 2000 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the NMEA2000 Engine Instance menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as shown in Figure 143 below Because only one such mapping can take place each engine on the J1939 network must have its own J2K100 Gateway The J1939 Source Address see section 6 18 4 identifies the engine on the J1939 network the Engine Instance identifies the engine to the NMEA2000 network Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW AS Maretron JAM 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEAZ000 Instance Engine de Transmission ACllee maker 0 J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JBW S None Figure
236. mping In order to smooth the results viewed on a display you may individually change the data damping period that the J2K100 uses when sending fuel rate and tachometer engine RPM information The default is to use no damping 0 0 seconds You may program the damping from none up to 5 seconds 6 18 1 2 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the J2K100 module on the network If a GenSet is connected to the J1939 network and the AC parameters passed through the J2K100 interface the GenSet will also be identified using Device Instance number Revision 1 6 2 Page 141 DSM250 User s Manual 6 18 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 18 1 4 J1939 Diagnostic Messages The J2K100 can optionally pass through J1939 diagnostic messages used to indicate fault conditions on engines and transmissions from the J1939 interface to the NMEA20008 network so that NMEA 2000 connected displays can interpret these diagnostic codes To change the transmission status of the J1939 diagnostic messages use the Scroll Up WY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cu
237. mpleted the current heading the current rate of turn and the current status of compass calibration If you do not wish to continue magnetic deviation calibration at this time press Abort and the currently stored deviation tables will be retained Once calibration is successful a completion screen will appear If calibration is unsuccessful a screen will appear indicating this and you should repeat the calibration procedure 6 24 6 Magnetic Deviation Status Pressing the Enter key with the Magnetic Variation Status menu item selected causes the screen shown in Figure 185 to be displayed Magnetic Deviation Status Est Magnetic Field Strength Horizontal 7 ul Vertical Bul Total Mul a Est Hard Iron Distortion Amplitude 99 ul Direction 1 Est Soft lron Distortion RWS 74 Avg 18 Max 467 Min i0 Power Bach Figure 185 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Status Screen 6 24 7 Rate of Turn Damping Period The SSC200 SSC300 is capable of transmitting the rate of turn of a vessel Different applications may require different damping for the rate of turn measurement The DSM250 may be used to set the damping period for the rate of turn measurement to anywhere between 0 1 seconds and 60 seconds Figure 186 shows an example of the damping period set to 2 seconds Revision 1 6 2 Page 173 DS
238. n 6 21 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 21 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The RIM100 Run Indicator Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 127501 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 165 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW D4 Maretron RIM 100 140012 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable HO Binary Switch Bank Figure 165 RIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate which is once every 15 seconds and each time the value changes e 1s 15s The status message will be transmitted at the perio
239. n Once you have begun the turn press Begin EY to start the calibration procedure If you do not wish to perform magnetic deviation calibration at this time press Abort 3 and the currently stored deviation tables will be retained If you are in a large vessel it may be difficult to turn the vessel in a small enough circle to avoid significant centrifugal force applied to the compass during magnetic deviation calibration This can cause the built in tilt sensors inside the compass to mistakenly believe that the compass is tilted during the magnetic deviation calibration which can adversely affect the quality of the magnetic deviation calibration especially in northerly latitudes where magnetic inclination magnetic dip is higher If this is the case instead of pressing the Begin key press the No Acc key This will cause the compass to ignore its tilt sensors and assume that the compass is level to the earth s surface during the calibration You must keep the boat level during calibration if you choose this option After you press the Begin key or the No Acc key a status screen will appear Figure 184 Page 172 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Rate of Turn 3 7 Degrees Magnetic Degrees second Current Status Deviation in Progress Last Status Idle Power Figure 184 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Progress Screen This progress screen shows the number of circles co
240. n 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 165 DSM250 User s Manual 6 23 3 Test This screen allows you to perform some basic diagnostics of the SMS100 and its connection to the cellular network If you select the Test item in the SMS100 configuration menu the screen in Figure 174 will be displayed SIM Card SIM INSERTED Operator AT amp T Signal Strength all Phone v 60207228 Bit Error Rate 08 to 16 Phone Number Message SMS Test Send Td Figure 174 SMS100 Test Screen The top section of the screen shows the current operating status of the SMS100 e SIM Card This entry shows the status of the SIM card Normally it should show SIM INSERTED e Operator This entry identifies the cellular provider the SMS100 is currently connected to e Phone This entry identifies the phone number used by the SMS100 This phone number is defined by the SIM card which is installed in the SMS100 e Signal Strength This entry shows the signal strength of the cellular network as seen by the SMS100 This signal strength is shown on a scale of one to five bars e Bit Error Rate This entry shows the bit error rate of the cellular network connection This figure may be requested by Maretron technical support personnel The middle section of the screen allows you to send a SMS text message to an arbitrary phone number To send a test message enter the phone number to whic
241. n Airmar speed transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 83 Pressing the Accept key while the Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the transducer s trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHX HUT SW 23 Airmar DST A9 PI He i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset Trip Log 0 0 nm GUE Power Cancel Accept Figure 38 Resetting the Airmar Speed Sensor Trip Distance Log Page 56 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 2 Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 Trim Tabs Configuration This describes the configuration of the Bennett EP 30 trim tabs firmware version 1 0 7 NMEA 1 NMEA 2000 Trim Tab Indicator Kit The EP 30 configuration menu is shown below in Figure 39 below and currently has the single entry Trim Tabs Calibration Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW 00 Lowrance EP Trim Ta _ 10 0 10 7 Trim Tabs Calibration Power Figure 39 EP 30 Trim Tabs Configuration Screen 6 2 1 Trim Tabs Calibration The Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 trim tabs calibration opening screen is shown in Figure 4
242. n DSM250 has the following features e NMEA 2000 Interface Waterproof NMEA 2000 Connector Sealed Waterproof Enclosure Powered Directly from NMEA 2000 Port Surface Flush or Gimbal Mounting Adjustable Multi colored Backlighting of Screen and Keys Preserves Night Vision Visual and Audible Alarms 16 User Configurable Favorite Screens Automatic or Manual Scrolling between Screens Capable of Viewing Virtually all NMEA 2000 Information including Batteries Engines Generators Shore Power Tanks Navigation Weather and More 1 4 Quick Install Installing the Maretron DSM250 display involves the following four steps Please refer to the individual sections for additional details e Unpack the Box Section 2 1 e Choose a Mounting Location Section 2 2 e Mount the DSM250 Section 2 3 e Connect the DSM250 Section 2 4 Revision 1 6 2 Page 1 DSM250 User s Manual 2 Installation 2 1 Unpacking the Box When unpacking the box containing the Maretron DSM250 you should find the following items e 1 DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Graphic Display 4 Mounting studs 4 Mounting washers 4 Mounting lock washers 4 Mounting knurled nuts 1 DSM250 User s Manual e 1 Warranty Registration Card If any of these items are missing or damaged please contact Maretron 2 2 Choosing a Mounting Location The DSM250 is housed in a waterproof enclosure IEC IP67 rating protected against the effects of temporary
243. n be used to raise an alert when the circuit breaker trips due to over current As with the On and Off alerts the Set Delay and Clear Delay values are used to prevent spurious triggering 8 3 7 6 1 Trigger Configuration Page 246 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Detail Channel 1 Aft Bilge Pump Description Location d Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Error Alert Re trigger Period 1 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuo us Remote Annunciator s SMS Text Settings Power Bach Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 291 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert Enter Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Tripped state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Tripped for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 7 Trigger Ty
244. n description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 26 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The TLM100 Tank Level Module transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 127505 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 212 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW 13 Haretron TLM 00 Fal Ti 10 114 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable os Fluid Level On Figure 212 TLM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message by pressing the Enter key EY on the message to be configured Options are Off The fluid level message will not be transmitted On The fluid level message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate which is once every 2 5 seconds Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 26 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 26 2 Label A label may be assigned to the TLM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically
245. n in fact there isn t enough fuel to return Time to empty is only applicable if the conditions remain the same Total Fuel Capacity displays the total capacity of all fuel tanks The DSM250 can only compute total fuel capacity assuming all totalized tanks are transmitting their capacity Total Fuel Level displays the percentage of fuel remaining in all fuel tanks Revision 1 6 2 Page 17 DSM250 User s Manual Total Fuel Consumption displays the total volume of fuel used per unit of distance traveled for example gallons per mile or liters per km using the specified GPS and specified engine instances within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details Total Trip Fuel Used displays the total volume of fuel used on the current trip from by all engines or fuel flow monitors that support the transmission of trip fuel used information on the network fuel flow transducers that are capable of being reset via the 126208 NMEA 20009 command of the Trip Fuel Used field of the 127497 Trip Parameters Engine message such as the Maretron FFM100 may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details 4 2 13 GPS Course Over Ground displays the current Course over Ground either true or magnetic depending on the Heading setting found under the Units menu item Lat Lon displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Speed Over Ground displays the current
246. n screen shown below indicates the sea temperature as measured by the DST110 which can be changed to the actual sea temperature by following these steps Use the Increase EY and Decrease Ed keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known sea temperature Press the Accept EY key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not Page 96 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron wish to perform temperature calibration at this time press the Abort key and the temperature calibration will not be altered Water Temperature Calibration 1 Select Water Temperature 83 4 TE 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 88 DST110 Water Temperature Calibration Screen 6 11 6 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the transducer depth offset parameter in a DST110 depth speed temperature transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should program a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the DST110 The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST110 to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the DST110 and the bottom of the keel The display will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth o
247. nable Disable The CLM100 Current Loop Monitor can transmit the NMEA2000 PGNs 65286 127751 130313 130314 180816 and 130840 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Only the PGN s which correspond to the configuration of the channels will be shown in this list Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 56 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHE HW SW 59 Maretron CLM 400 159901 10 10 16 Advanced Configuration NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable TT On 17751 DC Voltage I Current Un 103 8 Temperature Extended Range On TOY Actual Pressure On TIT Humidity On 65206 Fluid Flow Rate On Scroll Up Figure 52 CLM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The message will not be transmitted e Default The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate e 0 1s 25 0s The message will be transmitted at the period specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 5 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 5 2 Advanced Configuration Advan
248. nce position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Selecting this line will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 8 3 7 9 Trigger Type is Anchor Alert The Anchor Alert is a special case of the Outside Radius Alert Section 8 3 7 7 It is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves outside a programmable distance in any direction away from a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered The Outside Radius Alert and the Anchor Alert are very similar The Anchor Alert is designed to allow the input of relatively small radius values and may be displayed graphically through the Anchor Watch Display Section 7 1 The radius of the Outside Radius Alert is specified in either Nautical Miles or Kilometers while the radius of the A
249. nchor Alert is specified in Feet or Meters See Section 8 3 7 7 for details of the configuration of the Anchor Alert 8 3 7 10 Trigger Type is GPS Quality Alert The accuracy or quality of a position fix provided by a GPS is dependent on the number of satellites used to compute the position A position based on less than three satellites is considered a 1D lock three satellites is a 2D lock more than three satellites is a 3D lock and more than three satellites with SBAS is a 3D DGPS lock These different locks are indicative of the quality or accuracy of the given position with 1D having the lowest quality and 3D DGPS providing the highest quality The GPS Quality Alert is used to alert you if the quality of the position falls below a specified quality level Page 250 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 8 3 7 10 1 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert Alert Detail Data Instance Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type GPS Quality Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3D GPS Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 3D DGPS Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Local Audible Enable Figure 295 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amo
250. nd 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 Page 114 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 13 5 2 12 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 5 2 13 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 5 2 14 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 14Maretron FPM100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron FPM100 Fluid Pressure Monitor This describes the configuration of the Maretron FPM100 firmware version 1 0 1 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 2 Maretron FPH 1 150999 10 10 1 Channel A Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 53 Channel 4 Channel 9 Device Label ENGINE ROOM FPM100 Figure 103 FPM100 Configuration Screen 6 14 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typ
251. nections a SIM100 channel may be configured to detect an 8kQ resistor at the end of the circuit in the open state In this case a fully open circuit will reported as a fault condition See the manual for details Valid Modes are e Disable the channel is not being used e End Of Line Resistor an open circuit is a fault condition e No End Of Line Resistor an open circuit is not a fault condition select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 22 4 2 Label A label may be assigned to a channel as an aid to identifying the channel over the network Typically this label will describe the function of the switch connected to the channel See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 22 4 3 Reset Counter This resets the hardware counter associated with this channel to zero 6 22 4 4 Reset Timer This resets the hardware timer associated with this channel to zero Revision 1 6 2 Page 163 DSM250 User s Manual 6 23 Maretron SMS100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron SMS100 firmware version 2 0 1 9 The display may be used to configure the Device Instance and Installation Description on the SMS Text Module SMS100 After selecting the SMS100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HUT SW 18 Haretron SMS 100 159921 20 20
252. netic Variation Off Figure 180 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling EY or EY through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key EY 6 24 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 24 2 Installation Offset Calibration The installation offset e misalignment of installed SSC200 SSC300 with vessel s center line may be calibrated using the Maretron DSM250 display While executing Installation Offset Calibration the vessel must stay still with no pitch and roll because SSC200 SSC300 will also calibrate pitch and roll at this time Once the compass is installed point the vessel at a known heading and then select the compass from the Device Configuration menu Scroll down the menu items to the line entitled Installation Offset Calibration and press enter which takes you to the screen shown in Figure 181 Page 170 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Installation Offset Calibration 11 Select Current Heading 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Abort Increase Decrease Accept
253. nfiguration Screen cccccseececceeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeessaeeeeesaeeeees 132 Figure 129 GPS200 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Green 133 Figure 130 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS200 evrnnvrvvnnnvrvvrnnrrvennnnerennnnerennnnerennnnerennnnvne 134 Figure 131 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS200 rrnrrennnnnnevvnnnrrvnrnnrrnnrnnnrenvnnnrennnnnnennnnsrennnnsne 134 Fe UN PS Ola G52 00 a E E E E E EE 135 Figure 133 IPG100 Configuration Gcreen 136 Figure 134 IPG100 Advanced Configuration Screen coooccccccnccnnccnncnnconaconcononnncnnnnrnnononennnnoncnnnnnnnoss 136 Figure 135 IPG100 N2KServer Information Screen ccccoccncccccncccccncnonnnononononanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 137 Figure 136 IPG100 Client LIST DENNA E 138 Figure 137 IPG100 Maretron Cloud Services Status Display 139 Figure 138 J2K100 Configuration Gcreen 141 Figure 139 J2K100 Advanced Configuration Screen cccocccccccccccnncccnnnocnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnonannss 141 Figure 140 J2K100 J1939 Diagnostic Messages Comntiguraton 142 Figure 141 J2K100 Request Engine Hours Configuration cccconccncccoccncononcncononcnnononennnnoncnnnnnanoss 143 Revision 1 6 2 Page xiii DSM250 User s Manual Figure 142 J2K100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Green 143 Figure 143 J2K100 Engine Instance Configuration cooncccconcnccnncnccnnnnonnnnnonnnnnonarononncnnnnncnnonarinnnos 144 F
254. nfiguring the to Sender Gauge Resistance 6 25 9 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the TLA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 209 below Revision 1 6 2 Page 187 DSM250 User s Manual To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Gender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key EY to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 73 Maretron TLA WO 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 25 Gauge Resistance to sender KIY Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 209 Configuring the to Sender Gauge Resistance Page 188 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 26Maretron TLM100 Configuration The DSM250 may be
255. ng Fuel Rate 0 05 Tachometer 0 05 Device Instance Installation Description J1939 Diagnostic Messages Request Engine Hours il NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Scroll Up Figure 141 J2K100 Request Engine Hours Configuration 6 18 1 6 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The J2K100 interface transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HUT SW BE Maretron JK WO 124019 10 10 7 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable mn I EE 127489 Engine Parani Dynamic 127493 Transmission Parameters Dynamic zu 65030 Gen Avg Basic AC Quantities Off Power Figure 142 J2K100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling EY or EY through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key EY 6 18 1 7 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state Revision 1 6 2 Page 143 DSM250 User s Manual 6 18 2 Device Label A label
256. ng the Enter key with the Restore Factory Defaults menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 123 to be displayed This will cause the GPS200 to set all programmable settings to the factory default condition Revision 1 6 2 Page 133 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SW di Maretron oP5 200 PIM 10 34 Advanced Configuration Device Instance ei Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 130 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS200 6 16 2 Cold Start GPS The DSM250 is capable of restarting the GPS algorithm on a Maretron GPS200 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Cold start GPS Engine menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 124 to be displayed This will cause the GPS200 to discard all position and satellite data and compute a position fix Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW di Maretron DS A T 1 45 10 34 Advanced Configuration Label SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Figure 131 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS200 6 16 3 Device Label A label may be assigned to the GPS200 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this would describe the location of the GPS on the vessel See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 16 4 SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Disable The D
257. nnennnnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnsnnnnee 4 24 Connecting the DSM250 necios 5 221 e AAA 5 S Operating bt RE vannareal E EARE ELARA 6 TEN 6 3 2 Turning the DSM250 Om 6 SSC FORNES NNN 7 3 3 1 NINE 8 3 3 2 Choosing a Value from a Dei 8 395 FANN UE 8 Soe FOG TT NVE 8 S FORTIS OC MOG AP o TEE e 10 A 11 00140 et de 1165 EE 11 4 1 Favorite Screens ccccccccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesaeessaeeesaeeesaeeesaeetseetsneetaneeeas 11 4 2 Gategones and Dala e Java eee 11 lt A o 12 422 AC Generator 12 425 AO RUE 13 224 MTV 14 O APP PP E 14 A PN 14 RT td 14 220 MN ee ee er EE er en ee ere er 15 20 elle 15 AW EEE 16 121 FUN eera 16 2212 FVT 17 21 E ae 18 dad NNN 18 AAA annie EA A 18 A O E E E EE EE 18 4 2 17 MENN 19 EEG 19 ENK ET ES Mercadal 19 22720 FEN 20 APP q 20 Revision 1 6 2 Page ill DSM250 User s Manual 4222 STEN SES 20 42 23 Special EE Eege EEN 20 EE O OR Po ee eer 20 AO WAN EE 21 42 26 En ee EE 21 AT mme D PEN 21 2220 ae eege 22 A NRS 22 RE EE 22 EEE EE Go E 22 E BE Fn 24 FT A acesienaseraneoen saan E AEE A E cena 24 E E Net ek due Ve Y EE 24 235 ME PIOTR 24 4 3 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnannnnnannnnnansnnnnnsnnnnneen 24 EE 25 4 36 Available Alen Glasse EE 26 5 OpPerand MOodES rasiaan 27 S FESTENE NNN PN 27 E A 28 el Aln Sel ME sus vies cin dane E 29 er NE SN 29 520 Gomdqural n Men last a 29 5
258. nnennnsennnnennasennnn 39 Figure 27 Setting the Favorite Screen Format 0 cc 0c cccccececseccceseeecdeeececeteecceeecaceseeccesescceresetecss 40 Figure 28 Setting the Auto Change Interval ooccccoccnccccnncccncncconcnonononononnnonarononarnnnnnnnonnncncnnnons 40 PIQUE Ee dee me Da ee e creciera tercera 41 Figure 30 Selecting the Data to be displayed occccoccccocccncocccncconnnonononononononarononarononannononnnononens 41 IQS ER SIZ OE EE 43 Figure 32 Device Configuration Screen ccccceccccseececeeececaeeeecaeeeeceeceeseueeeseueesseeeessaeeesseeeesseeeesaeees 51 Figure 33 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducer Configuration Screen rrrrrnnrrvnnnnnnnnnnr 52 Figure 34 Airmar Transducer Advanced Configuration Gcreen 53 Figure 35 Calibrating the Airmar Speed Transducer Speed rrnrrvvnnnrvvnnrvvvnnrvnvnrrennnrrennnnrennnnsnnnnne 54 Figure 36 Airmar Temperature Transducer Water Temperature Calibration Screen rrrrnnrrrnnnnr 55 Figure 37 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in an Airmar Depth Transcducer 55 Figure 38 Resetting the Amar Speed Sensor Trip Distance og 56 Figure 39 EP 30 Trim Tabs Configuration Screen occcccoccncccccncconcnocononononnnonanononannnonarnnonnnnononcnnnnnnos 57 Figure 40 EP 30 Trim Tabs Calibration Opening Gcreen 57 Figure 41 EP 30 Intermediate Calibration Gcreen 58 Figure 42 EP 30 Calibration Success Meseag
259. nnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnennnnnrennnnnrennnnsnennnnnner 188 Figure 210 TLM100 Configuration Gcreen 189 Figure 211 TLM100 Advanced Configuration Screen rrrrrrnnrrvvrnnvnvernaverennnnerernnnerernnnerennnneneennnvne 189 Figure 212 TLM100 NMEA 20009 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 190 Figure 213 Configuring the Tank Capacry 191 Figure 214 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Gcreen 191 Figure 215 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Montor 192 Figure 216 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation nn0nnnannannoennnannnnnnnnnnennnnnesnrrnnrnnnnnnne 193 Figure 217 Empty Level Calibration ccccconncncoconcnnoconnnnonnnnononnnnnnnonanoncononnnnonnnrnnonnnrnnnnnncnnnnnnnoss 193 Figure 218 Intermediate Level Calibration ocooooncnccconnnnccnocnnconononcnnanonnonanoncnnnnrnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnanoss 194 Figure 219 Full Level Calibration ooccccoconcncococnnnoconcncncnnconononcnnonnnnononnnnnnconannnnnnancnnonancnnnnnnnos 194 Figure 220 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeees 195 Figure 221 Rectangular Tank Gelechon 195 Fouro 222 Rectangular Tnk Calibr aUo tratara puestas 196 Figure 223 TMP100 Configuration Gcreen 197 Figure 224 TMP100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen eee eee cree eae ee eee eeaaee eee eeaaaeeeeeeaaaees 197 Figure 225 TMP100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Green 198 Figure 226 TMP
260. nnrnnnnnnnnnnncnnns 68 6 6 Maretron DCM100 Configuration cccoccncccccncconnnccnnnnccnnnnnonnnnonnnnnonncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnns 70 6 6 1 Advanced CGonfguraton 71 6 6 2 Current Sensor Zero Offset CGalbraton 72 603 DO KE 73 6 6 4 SA 75 660 EE EE 75 6 Maretron DOR OO COC A OG E 76 6 7 1 Advanced CGonfguraton 76 or PLN 78 SEE EE EEE SE SSN 78 674 Ghannel 1 70 Contigua ON WEE 78 6 8 Maretron DSM200 CGontguraton 81 6 8 1 Remote Device Gelechon 81 6 9 Maretron DSM150 DSM150 Confgouraton 83 DL FEE SN 83 6 9 2 Copy alarms settings from local display oooncccconcncconcnccnnnnonanononacononaconnnncncnnnnnnos 84 6 9 3 Copy device selection from local display n nnnnsnnnennnsnnsnennesnrenrrrnsnrrsrrrnrrresrrrerrrennne 85 6 9 4 Copy display settings from local display ccconcccconnncconnncconnnonncononacononannnnonenonnnnnnos 86 6 9 5 Copy favorite settings from local display 1nnn0nnn0nnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnrnnnnrnsnrrneneennni 86 6 9 6 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display 87 6 9 7 Copy all settings from local display oocccocccconcnconcnccncnconnncnncnnoncnonacononconnaronnncnnnos 87 SEENEN 88 699 REMOTE DEVICE O vr 88 6 10 Maretron DST100 Configuration ccccoccncccccnccccnncconnnononnnononnnonnnononncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnns 90 6 0 1 AQVAanceda Omi ul O E 90 6 10 2 Clear Speed CalibratiON cccoooccccccnnnoccnncoccnnnonnnncnnnnnononnnononnn
261. now the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm menu item Figure 204 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over this menu item and then press the Enter key to store the calibration values within the TLA100 and complete the calibration process Page 184 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW 10 Maretron TLA 10 2007151 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Enter Power Bach gie Scroll We Down Figure 204 European Standard Sender Calibration 6 25 5 Tank Number Next the tank number must be configured A tank number can have a value between 0 and 15 Each tank of a particular tyoe must have a tank number that is different from all other tanks of the same type For instance only one TLA100 on a fuel tank may have tank number equal to 0 A screenshot of tank number configuration is shown in Figure 205 below In order to configure the tank number use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to Tank Number then press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the tank number value Use the Scroll Up OY or Scroll Down EY
262. nufacturer Model SHY HU SW 99 Maretron SSC 1120707 20 2011 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings sentence Rate Selection OH ms 10 0Hz HDH Disable HDT Disable ROT 200ms 5 0Hz ATT W lms 10Hz Vanation Time Sms 0 2Hz Figure 178 SSC200 SSC300 NMEA 0183 Sentence Rate Selection Screen 6 24 1 3 3 Load Default Sentence Rate Selection The Load Default Sentence Rate Selection option will reset the NMEA 0183 sentence enable disable status along with transmission intervals and variation time to their factory default settings Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 11720224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings Sentence Rate Selection Load Default Sentence Rate Selection Power Figure 179 SSC200 SSC300 Load Default Periodic Rate Selection Revision 1 6 2 Page 169 DSM250 User s Manual 6 24 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The SSC200 SSC300 compass transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 127250 Vessel Heading On 17251 Rate Of Turn On D7257 Attitude On T7258 Mag
263. numbers Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required numeral and press Enter to transfer the numeral to the cursor position If another numeral is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a punctuation character or other symbol use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Sign and then press Enter to go across to the sign characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another sign character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a space use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Space and then press Enter To delete the character immediately preceding the underscore use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Back and then press Enter Note that it is not possible to delete the entire text string use the Back function repeatedly to delete the characters one at a time Revision 1 6 2 Page 9 DSM250 User s Manual To abort the entire textual edit and return to the original field without changing the contents of the field use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Exit without Saving and then press Enter To enter the text string in the original field use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Save and Exit and th
264. o display operation Display Settings Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep On Label Language English Software Version 1 6 2 3 Figure 13 DSM250 Display Settings Screen 5 2 4 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Display Settings Advanced Configuration Device Instance 3 Installation Description 1 Helm 2 Primary Device Selection Refresh Network Information Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Up Figure 14 DSM250 Advanced Configuration 5 2 4 1 1 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 31 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 4 1 2 Primary Device Selection Not all the data displayed by the DSM250 can be taken directly off the NMEA 2000 bus Some require calculations with other parameters before the desired value can be displayed An example wou
265. of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source iis YA Power Figure 190 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 2000 Only If there is no magnetic variation source available on either the NMEA 20009 or the NMEA 0183 interface and you wish to display true heading information you may manually enter a magnetic variation To set a manual variation value you must change the variation source by pushing the Enter key EY with the Variation Source menu item selected This highlights the next field where you select Manual Entry by scrolling EY or EY through the options until you reach Manual Entry Pressing the Enter key with the Manual Entry menu item selected takes you to the screen shown in Figure 191 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source Manual Entry MY Power Figure 191 Entering Manual Variation Press the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down key to change the amount of East or West variation Press the Accept Key when the desired number is shown You may also disable manual variation by setting the value to
266. of the fix 6 15 4 Device Label A label may be assigned to the GPS100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this would describe the location of the GPS on the vessel See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 15 5 SBAS WAAS Enable Disable The DSM250 is capable of enabling or disabling the SBAS WAAS function on a Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS100 You can change this setting by pressing the Enter key EW with the SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 126 to be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine GPS Mode Auto Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS EIEIO Page 130 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Figure 126 Configuring SBAS on a GPS100 The allowable option for SBAS configuration are either Disable which causes the GPS100 not to use SBAS satellites or Enable which causes the GPS100 to use SBAS satellites for developing a position fix Revision 1 6 2 Page 131 DSM250 User s Manual 6 16Maretron GPS200 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron GPS200 firmware version 3 5 0 The GPS200 has several different programmable parameters that are configurable by the DSM250 display Normally it is not necessary to configure the GPS200 although there ma
267. of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis perpendicular to the ship s keel Roll displays the roll of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis parallel to the ship s keel Trim Tabs displays the position of the vessel s trim tabs Trim Tab Port displays the position of the port trim tab Trim Tab Starboard displays the position of the starboard trim tab 4 2 31 Wind Apparent Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to the vessel center line as it appears to an observer on the deck of a moving or stationary vessel does not subtract out the speed of the vessel Ground Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see Section 5 2 7 1 measured relative to a stationary observer calculated using heading course over ground COG and speed over ground SOG True Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to the vessel center line vessel s speed is subtracted from Apparent wind direction calculated using speed through water STW or speed over ground SOG depending on the unit setting of the Wind True Vessel Ref Parameter see Section 5 2 7 6 Apparent Speed displays the speed of the wind as it appears to an observer on the deck of a moving or stationary vessel does not subtract out the speed of the vessel Ground Speed displays the speed of the wind relative to a stationary observer ca
268. olor backgrounds Use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight to the color you want to change and then press the Enter key 3 Use the Scroll Up EY or Scroll Down keys with the percentage number selected to change that particular color s intensity You can also switch the background color to the foreground color by changing the Inverse Background to Revision 1 6 2 Page 35 DSM250 User s Manual On The background will switch to black and the percentage color settings are now used to define the foreground color The Restore Factory Defaults menu selection will restore all of the color sets to their factory default states 5 2 4 5 Demo Mode The DSM250 has a demo mode suited for displaying the capabilities of the unit It causes the DSM250 to operate in a simulated data mode where the DSM250 will install a set of pre defined favorite screens and other configuration and will then display only the internally generated simulated data and will ignore any data arriving over the NMEA 2000 bus While in demo mode the DSM250 will display a Demo indicator in the upper right hand corner of the screen Programming this option to On Show Room Mode or On Boat Show Mode No Auto Reset will cause the DSM250 to enter the demo mode while programming this option for Off Normal Use Mode will cause the DSM250 to return to using data from the NMEA 2000 bus In order to be ab
269. on Variation Source NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 Figure 175 SSC200 SSC300 Configuration Screen 6 24 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 49 Maretron SSC200 1120224 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA0183 Settings NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Figure 176 SSC200 SSC300 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 24 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 6 2 Page 167 DSM250 User s Manual 6 24 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 24 1 3 NMEA0183 Settings Several characteristics of the NMEA 0183 interface of the
270. on parameters to the raw data received This operation allows one DSM250 to copy its calibration table to a second DSM150 DSM250 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 17 Maretron DSM250 1300178 10 13 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Power Figure 75 DSM150 DSM250 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display 6 9 7 Copy all settings from local display This is the single operation that makes it easy to have multiple DSM150 DSM250 displays on a boat Set one DSM150 DSM250 up so that all its settings are correct and quickly transfer all the alarms device settings and display setting to another DSM150 DSM250 Then go in and update the following information to customize the new device e Display Settings gt Advanced Configuration gt Installation Descriptions e Display Settings gt Label Also use this function to copy settings from an old DSM150 DSM250 to a new DSM150 DSM250 when replacing the device Revision 1 6 2 Page 87 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW Swe 13 T Maretron DSM250 300178 10 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settin
271. onfiguration NA Manufacturer Model SHE HWE SW B1 Maretron ACH WO TENH 10 10 652 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 65006 il Phase C AC Reactive Power il Phase C AC Power il Phase C AC Basic Quant il Phase B AC Reactive Power il Phase B AC Power il Phase B AC Basic Quant il Phase AC Reactive Power 233353233 Figure 45 ACM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen Revision 1 6 2 Page 61 DSM250 User s Manual You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Options are e Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate e 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 3 1 11 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the ACM100 device to their factory default state 6 3 2 AC Circuit Type You must configure the ACM100 as to what type of AC circuit connection it is monitoring The allowable values for this parameter are as follows e Single Phase Phase A use this value when power is connected via a single hot wire and a single neutral wire a typical 110VAC connection in the US or 220VAC connection in Europe e Single Phase Phase A B use this value when
272. only calibrate if the apparent wind speed is greater than 2 2 Revision 1 6 2 Page 207 DSM250 User s Manual miles hour If the apparent wind speed is lower than this then an error message will appear which is shown in Figure 237 below and the calibration process will be aborted Installation Unable to set the installation offset Note Installation offset can be done only at wind speed more than 1 mis 22 mph Accept Figure 237 S WS0100 Configuration Aborted Due to Low Wind Speed If the wind speed is sufficient then a confirmation screen shown in Figure 238 below will appear indicating that a successful installation offset calibration has completed et Accept Figure 238 Installation Offset Success Confirmation Screen You may instead abort calibration by pressing the Abort Key If you do this the installation offset calibration process will be aborted and a message will appear noting that this has happened which appears in Figure 239 below Page 208 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Installation Offset Installation Offset Calibration has been aborted Previous offset value has been restored Figure 239 Installation Offset Abort Confirmation Screen 6 32 4 Wind Data Damping Period The WSO100 comes from the factory preset with a damping period of 1 5 seconds which should be appropriate for most applications However you may use the DSM250 to tune the damping period
273. onnnnnonnrnnnnnrnnnnannnnnnnnns 91 6 103 Ee Ee Cala ON dis 91 6 10 4 Transducer Depth OT SE t oooccoccccocccnocccnoconnonanonnnnnonannonannnnnnnonnnnonannnnannnnannonannnnos 92 JE OG A 92 611 Maretron DS HIO Co UA E 94 Be Ted FONEM 94 6 11 2 Clear Speed CalibratiON ccooocncccccnnoccnnnocononennnnnnnncnonononononnnonnnnnonnrnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 95 6 Lo SEN NNN 96 6 11 4 Clear Temperature Offset rrrrrnnnrrnnnnrrrannerrnnrrrnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnennnnnennannennansennassennansnnnnssen 96 6 11 59 Temperature ANN 96 6 11 6 Transducer Depth COiteet 97 Sege tele IG BE 98 6 12 Maretron EMS100 CGontfguraton eNEAN EESE 99 Revision 1 6 2 Page v DSM250 User s Manual 6121 ENGINE NENNE 99 6 122 Boost Pressure Gauge TV E 99 6 123 Boobs Presse SET Ke 100 6 12 4 Boost Pressure Sender Offset 100 6 125 Dive Tum Gage Wii 100 6 126 Drive euer 100 6 127 Dive Tim ue EE CT GEN 101 6 12 38 Al Presse GAGE Ty EE 101 6129 Ol Pressure Sender VD ads 101 6 12 1001 Pressure Sender OSEN excgosscesacussersoieineseoivessepedessessaisnsesnetseeasaiemesseissasreeneestse 101 6 12 11 Water Temperature Gauge Tvpe 102 6 12 12Water Temperature Sender Type occccoccncccccncccccncccnnnononcnonononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnonarnnnncnnnnnens 102 6 12 13Water Temperature Sender Offset asanarea a 102 61214 PES ET Ende Tei 102 6 12 15 laChOMeter FME TEEN vr AA 103 6 13 Maretrom EEMTO0 COMUN rias 104 6 131 Advanced ut de sar A 104 6132 DEE LEDGER
274. oon Phase Sunrise Sunset Local Time UTC Time Twilight AM Twilight PM ransmission Vessel Apparent Direction and Speed True Direction and Speed Ground Direction and Speed NMEA 2000 Parameter Group Numbers PGNs Rate Response to Requested 126464 GN List Transmit and Receive PGNs 26996 Product Information Pressure Vacuum Time 0 00 Z lt F I I OD Q O O O lt D I 3 CD lt ESO 33 2 alo Kei Q OI O a D D 5 Q 5 3 53 O La O O a IK S 5 8 gt MD Protocol PGNs Page 268 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron po 26208 NMA NA _ Received PGNs 060416 ISO Transport Protocol Connection N A Management 65002 Bus 1 Phase B Basic AC Quantities 65003 Bus 1 Phase A Basic AC Quantities 65004 Bus 1 Average Basic AC Quantities 127245 Rudder Revision 1 6 2 Page 269 DSM250 User s Manual 127513 Battery Configuration Status NA i B i 129025 Position Rapid Update N A 1 129029 GNSS Position Data 1 1 1 3 29026 COG amp SOG Rapid Update 130312 Temperature NA 130314 Actual Pressure N A 130818 Label Maretron Page 270 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 130834 SMS Status Maretron 130835 SMS Text Message Maretron 130836 Switch Status Counter Maretron 130837 Switch Status Timer Maretron 130840 Generic Sensor Maretron Electrical Comment DC Voltage Low Supply Full Brightness lt
275. option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons Page 238 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 8 3 4 Trigger Source This allows the selection of the parameter to be monitored The parameters are laid out as per section 4 2 The trigger source is specified in three parts which when combined will uniquely identify a single parameter on the bus 8 3 4 1 Type The Type corresponds to the category of data The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 4 2 Data The Data corresponds to the Data Type of data The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 4 3 Instance The Instance corresponds to the instance of the data type on the bus The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 5 Description This is a textual field that will be displayed on the DSM250 and transmitted to Alert Slave devices It is intended to describe the alert e g Fire 8 3 6 Location This is a textual field that will be displayed on the DSM250 and transmitted to Alert Slave devices It is intended to describe the location at which the problem was detected e g Main Stateroom 8 3 7 Trigger Configuration This set of fields is used to describe the condition under which the alert will be triggered The sub fields will vary depending on the Trigger Type which in turn is determined by the Trigger Source 8 3 7 1 Trigger Type is High Alert A high alert is use
276. or Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the Generator Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase C Real Power displays real power output on phase C of the generator Phase C Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase C of the Generator Phase C Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase C of the Generator Phase C Power Factor displays power factor of phase C of the Generator 4 2 3 AC Utility Average Current displays average current of the AC power on the utility Average Frequency displays average frequency of the AC power on the utility Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the utility Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the utility Total Real Power displays real power output by the utility Total Reactive Power displays reactive power output by the utility Total Apparent Power displays apparent power output by the utility Total Power Factor displays power factor of the utility Total KWH Export displays total energy produced by the utility for the Maretron ACM100 this parameter s value may be reset to zero with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Total KWH Import di
277. or disable the transmission of the Annunciator message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The Annunciator message will not be transmitted e Default The Annunciator message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate and each time the value changes e 0 55 5s The Annunciator message will be transmitted at the period specified and each time the value changes Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 4 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 4 2 Instance From here the instance number used in the Annunciator message may be set 6 4 3 Label A label may be assigned to the ALM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the ALM100 See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 65 DSM250 User s Manual 6 4 4 Test Annunciator The Annunciator may be tested by scrolling the cursor to highlight this entry and then pressing the Enter button The ALM100 will emit a single beep Page 66 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 5 Maretron CLM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron CLM100 firmware version 1 0 1 6 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Mode
278. ounter 0 Frames Figure 17 Bus Status Display Revision 1 6 2 Page 33 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 4 3 Backlight The DSM250 has three user programmable lighting levels which may be cycled through using the Lights key on the keypad while the DSM250 is operating in favorite screens mode Each time you quick press the Lights key 3 in favorite screens mode the DSM250 backlight will transition between the Low setting the Medium setting and the High setting Note that a quick press of the Lights key changes the screen intensity or backlight while a long press changes the color palette as described in Section 5 2 4 4 The Backlight menu allows you to program the Low Medium and High brightness levels The value that appears next to the appropriate setting is measured in percent of full brightness The Backlight menu can be seen in Figure 18 below Display Settings Backlight ETA 33 Medium 66 High 100 Power Figure 18 Backlight Menu 5 2 4 4 Color Setup The DSM250 has eight user programmable color palettes The default color palettes are as follows Color Set 1 White Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 2 Red Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 43 Blue Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 4 Green Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 5 Black Background White Foreground Color Set 6 Black Background R
279. owing these steps First pick a soeed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase EW and Decrease UY keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept EY key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform speed calibration at this time press the Abort 9 key and the speed calibration will not be altered 6 11 4 Clear Temperature Offset The Clear Temperature Offset configuration parameter shows you the currently used temperature correction offset All measured sea temperature readings have this value added to them before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can set the correction offset to zero by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 3 This changes the correction factor back to 0 such that all subsequent measured sea temperature readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network 6 11 5 Temperature Calibration The temperature calibratio
280. pable of configuring the Maretron FFM100 Fluid Flow Monitor This describes the configuration of the Maretron FFM100 firmware version 1 1 2 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679009 10 1121 Device Label PORT ENGINE FUEL FLOW INTERFACE Operating Mode Differential Channel ei Channel 1 Figure 93 FFM100 Configuration Screen 6 13 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SV 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679009 10 1121 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 1 Channel 0 Normal Installation Channel 1 Normal Installation Channel 0 Allow negative Yes Channel 1 Allow negative flow Yes Differential Mode Allow negative flow No Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disa ble Scroll Up Figure 94 FFM100 Advanced Configuration 6 13 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 13 1 2 Channel 0 Installation Leave this entry at the default value of Normal Installation if the flow sensor
281. parameter being monitored rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the parameter value falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must fall below the Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds 8 3 7 2 Trigger Type is Low Alert A low alert is used to signal you when a parameter value falls below a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the port engine oil pressure rises falls below 40 PSI 8 3 2 1 Parameters A low alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below Revision 1 6 2 Page 241 DSM250 User s Manual Low Alert Parameters HA Inactive MIA Active gt Accepted Clear Delay S Low Alert D Clear Point i Low Alert transi
282. pe is Outside Radius Alert The Outside Radius Alert is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves outside a programmable distance in any direction away from a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered Figure 292 shows an Outside Radius Alert and associated parameters The Outside Radius Alert and the Anchor Alert are very similar The radius of the Outside Radius Alert is specified in either Nautical Miles or Kilometers while the radius of the Anchor Alert is specified in Feet or Meters 8 3 7 7 1 Parameters Revision 1 6 2 Page 247 DSM250 User s Manual Outside Radius Alert Parameters Outside Radius HA Inactive Alert transitions to kite the Active state Active A after Set Delay Wi E Radius away from sacnads E Awaiting Cancel Ai the Reference y Point c Outside Radius Alert v i transitions to the Awaiting L i i Cancel state after Clear Vv I ao Delay seconds Set Radius lt UN wn i i 3 Set Delay Clear Radius i Operator Cancels Kai i Alert Y Vessel moves Ej o i c closer than Clear Clear Delay P Radius away from A the Reference Point Time Figure 292 Outside Alert Parameters 8 3 7 7 2 Trigger Configuration Outsi
283. perature sensor 6 29 3 Device Label A label may be assigned to the TMP100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the TMP100 Revision 1 6 2 Page 199 DSM250 User s Manual 6 30Maretron USB100 Configuration Maretron USB100 gateways on the network may be configured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron USB100 firmware version 1 8 3 The USB100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 227 below There is one configurable item for the USB100 and that is Remote Device Selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 3 Maretron USBRO 19054 10 18 2 Power Figure 227 USB100 Configuration Screen 6 30 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 56 Maretron USB 100 116054 10 18 2 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 1 Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Power Figure 228 USB100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 30 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0
284. points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 199 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Current Point highlight will advance to the next point Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 12 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point Bl 23456 78 IWA BHG Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 199 Empty Level Calibration Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and advance to the next calibration point Figure 200 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Page 182 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks
285. power is connected via two hot wires 180 out of phase with each other and single neutral wire from a single phase of a transformer a typical 220VAC connection in the US e 3 Phase Y Phase A B C use this value when power is connected via the three hot wires 120 out of phase with each other and single neutral wire from a three phase Y connected circuit 6 3 3 AC Device Type You must configure the ACM100 as to what type of AC source it is monitoring The allowable values for this parameter are as follows e Generator default use this value when you are monitoring the output of an onboard generator e Utility use this value when you are monitoring shore power e Bus use this value if you are monitoring power flowing across a cable that is not located directly at the output of a generator or a shore power connection e g an AC selection switch might have as an input the shore power and another input from the generator connecting the ACM100 at the output of the AC selection switch would require the ACM100 to be configured as Bus 6 3 4 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple ACM100s on the network 6 3 5 Label A device label may be assigned to the ACM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network i e Shore Power or Port Generator etc Typically this
286. r s Manual Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successtully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Press any key to continue Current Point 12345678 IDNBDDHB Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 202 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 25 4 2 American Standard Sender Calibration If you have a rectangular tank and a sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms full 33 ohms empty and you know the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm menu item Figure 203 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over this menu item and then press the Enter key to write the calibration values within the TLA100 and complete the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HVI SW 70 Maretron TLA 19 2007151 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Power Bach gen E Enter Figure 203 American Standard Sender Calibration 6 25 4 3 European Standard Sender Calibration If you have a rectangular tank and a sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms full 180 ohms empty and you k
287. r label Set this entry to No to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the direction of fuel flow is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 13 1 6 Differential Mode Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of No for the FFM100 to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the computed net fuel flow rate is negative Set this entry to Yes for the FFM100 to output negative values for the fuel flow rate if the computed net fuel flow rate is negative 6 13 1 7 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 13 1 8 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The FFM100 Fuel Flow Module transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 95 Revision 1 6 2 Page 105 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1670099 10 1121 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Engine Parameters Dynamic Trip Parameters Engine Temperature Fluid F
288. ransducer depth offset parameter in a DST100 depth speed temperature transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should program a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the DST100 The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST100 to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the DST100 and the bottom of the keel The display will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST100 showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 82 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW OE Maretron DST 100 ID 50825 D235 1 3 09 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 Speed Calibration Transducer Depth Offset MEX Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 82 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DST100 With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys 6 or EY Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key
289. ransmission of the messages by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Disable The message will not be transmitted Default The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5 0s The message will be transmitted at the interval specified select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key Notice that by default the old Environmental Parameters message PGN 130310 is disabled while the new Environmental Parameters message PGN 130311 is enabled The reason for this is that the old message has been discontinued by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA in favor of the new message If you find that a particular display is not showing particular information i e temperature humidity or barometric pressure go ahead and enable the old message to see if data then becomes available 6 32 1 7 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 32 2 Device Label A device label may be assigned to the WSO100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network see Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 206 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 8A Maretron WSO 1200421 20 20 2 Advanced Configuration Device Label iI Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4
290. ration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 8A Maretron WSO 1200421 20 20 2 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 12 Percent Outside Temperature EAR Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 243 Setting the Outside Temperature Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct temperature and the press the Enter button to store it Revision 1 6 2 Page 211 DSM250 User s Manual 7 Data Display Types 7 1 Anchor Watch Display The Anchor Watch Display is a graphical representation of an Anchor Alert See Section 8 3 7 9 for details on how to set up the Anchor Alert Anchor Watch Figure 244 Anchor Watch Display Example The display is centered on the position at which the anchor is dropped this point is represented by the anchor symbol The control is always oriented North up with the boundary circle located at the Alert Set Point distance from the anchor position The position of the vessel is represented by the boat symbol This is oriented according to the heading of the boat You may use the control mode of the display to easily set the Anchor Drop position as follows In order to set the Anchor Drop position using the display create a screen with an Anchor Watch display In normal operating mode use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down ke
291. rature Coefficient The capacity of a battery generally increases with increasing temperature So that the DCM100 can properly calculate the battery s state of charge program this parameter with the increase in battery Capacity in percent per increase in temperature in degrees Celsius The temperature coefficient can be set to a value between 0 C 5 C 6 6 3 5 Peukert Exponent The Peukert Exponent for the battery can be set to a value between 1 0 and 1 5 Please refer to section 4 8 on page 11 for details 6 6 3 6 Charge Efficiency Factor The Charge Efficiency Factor for the battery can be set to a value between 5 and 100 Please refer to Section 4 6 1 on page 11 for details 6 6 3 7 Fully Charged Voltage In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery is fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery current remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter Page 74 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 6 3 8 Fully Charged Current In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery is fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery curr
292. rce NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 Power Figure 182 Setting the Installation Orientation Revision 1 6 2 Page 171 DSM250 User s Manual The choices that are offered are Normal Installation default Backward Installation Upside Down Installation or Upside Down and Backward 6 24 4 Label This menu item allows you to set a text label for the device This text label will help you to identify a particular device when you have more than one of the same type in the system and appears when selecting devices in both the DSM250 and in N2K View see Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 24 5 Magnetic Deviation Calibration The DSM250 is capable of performing magnetic deviation calibration on a Maretron SSC200 SSC300 solid state compass The Rate of Turn Offset Calibration Section 6 24 8 should be done before the Deviation Calibration The first screen Figure 183 gives instructions for performing the procedure First begin to turn the boat in a slow circle either clockwise or counter clockwise at about 3 to 12 degrees per second Magnetic Deviation Calibration 11 Begin to turn boat in a slow circle 0 5 2 minleirele or 3 12 ie Current Rate of Turn 1 8 Is 2 Press lt Begin gt to begin calibration or press lt No Ace gt to begin calibration with accelerometer disabled Ho Acc Begin Figure 183 SSC200 SSC300 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Start Scree
293. rential or Two Independent Sensors Page 106 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 13 4 1 Channel 0 Differential Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential The Channel 0 Differential Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679099 10 1121 Channel ei RSR Supply Engine Instance ai Engine Label PORT ENGINE K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 0s Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance e Temperature Source User Defined 129 Figure 96 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Differential Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679099 10 1121 Channel Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label PORT FUEL TEMP Flow Instance Flow Label PORT FUEL FLOW Volume Instance VEME PORT FUEL VOLUME Figure 97 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Differential Mode 6 13 4 1 1 Channel Supply Return You may select whether the Channel 0 fuel flow sensor is connected to the supply fuel line or the return fuel line 6 13 4 1 2 Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instan
294. ressing the Enter button again 8 3 13 Operating Mode Underway See Section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Underway state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 3 14 Operating Mode Anchored See Section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Anchored state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 3 15 Scope Alerts may be constrained to be displayed only on the DSM250 where they are detected In this case the Alert message is not sent out on the NMEA2000 bus and other devices will not display the alert or allow Accepting of Cancelling The Scope does not affect the generation of Annunciator messages The options here are Page 256 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron e Local the Alert messages are not transmitted e Global the Alert messages are transmitted The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 4 Deleting an Alert From the Alert Setup Menu select the menu item Delete Alert Alert Setup Add New Alert
295. retron 4 2 12 Fuel Management WARNING Maretron fuel management products are designed to be accurate and reliable however they should be used only as aids for fuel management and not as a replacement for traditional fuel management techniques BEWARE Conditions can quickly change that drastically effect time and distance to empty You should not use the fuel management data types unless you fully understand all the parameters associated with fuel management All fuel tanks and all engines must be included when setting up the DSM250 plus there must be accurate fuel rate sensors installed on the vessel and accurate speed information in order for the DSM250 to properly display fuel management information You should also note that fuel levels may contain significant error if the boat is not sitting level in the water i e sailboat heeled over or a power boat riding bow up won t necessarily report the correct amount of fuel Even when setup correctly the DSM250 should be used only as an aid and not the sole source for fuel management information Total Fuel Economy displays distance traveled per unit fuel used for example miles per gallon or kilometers per liter using the specified GPS and specified engine instances within the favorite screen setup See Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details Total Fuel Rate displays rate of fuel usage per unit time for example gallons or liters per hour for all engine instances specified within the favo
296. retron RAA100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron RAA100 firmware version 1 4 9 Maretron RAA100 rudder angle adapters on the network may be configured using the DSM250 The RAA100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 149 below Page 148 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration abel Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Power Figure 149 RAA100 Configuration Screen 6 20 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 62 Maretron RAA 100 1299991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Device Tnstance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 150 RAA100 Advanced Configuration Menu 6 20 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 20 1 2 Ins
297. rite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details Total Fuel Remaining displays total fuel remaining in all fuel tanks specified within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 In order for the DSM250 to properly calculate total fuel remaining tank monitors connected to the network must provide tank capacity in addition to fluid level Distance to Empty displays the distance you can travel before all fuel is consumed assuming all conditions remain the same The DSM250 computes distance to empty using several different parameters including the total fuel remaining See above and fuel economy also discussed above Remember conditions can rapidly change that may drastically effect distance to empty For example if you are going out to sea with the wind and current behind you the distance to empty may indicate that there is enough fuel to return home when in fact there isn t enough fuel to return Distance to empty is only applicable if the conditions remain the same Time to Empty displays the amount of time you can travel before all fuel is consumed assuming all conditions remain the same The DSM250 computes time to empty using total fuel remaining See above and the engine s fuel rate Remember conditions can rapidly change that may drastically effect time to empty For example if you are going out to sea with the wind and current behind you the time to empty may indicate that there is enough fuel to return home whe
298. roll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then pressing the Enter key The following screen will be displayed Page 198 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HUT SV 29 Maretron TMP 100 150009 10 111 Channel 0 Instance E Source Inside Temperature Label Lobby Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 226 TMP100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 29 2 1 Instance The Data Instance of the Temperature as sent in PGNs 130311 130312 and 130823 is set in this field Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct instance number and the press the Enter button to store it 6 29 2 2 Source In the NUEA2000 PGNs each temperature is associated with a source type Possible values are Bait Well Temperature Engine Room Temperature Exhaust Gas Temperature Freezer Temperature Heating System Temperature Inside Temperature Live Well Temperature Main Cabin Temperature Outside Temperature Refrigeration Temperature Sea Temperature User Defined Temperature 129 4144 Use this when none of the above options are suitable Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the correct source and the press the Enter button to store it 6 29 2 3 Label A label may be assigned to each channel of the TMP100 as an aid to identifying the temperature that is being displayed Typically this label will describe the function or location of the tem
299. rough a process in which you set the rudder to full port then center and then full starboard each time indicating the angle of the rudder to the DSM250 The RAA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the rudder angle Custom calibration is necessary for non Revision 1 6 2 Page 151 DSM250 User s Manual standard values of resistances for rudder angle senders and for rudders with maximum port and starboard angles of anything other than 45 To perform custom calibration of the rudder angle sender use the Scroll Up WY or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Figure 154 shows the DSM250 with the Custom Rudder Calibration menu item highlighted Configuration Device Configuration WA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 60 Maretron RAA 100 10 12 Rudder Angle Calibration Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Power Bach Enter gi Scroll Figure 154 RAA100 Custom Rudder Angle Calibration The first step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process is to turn the wheel hard over to starboard and to measure the angle or the rudder angle from center with a protractor or other instrument Use the Increase an
300. rsor to the J1939 Diagnostic Messages menu item Then press the Enter key 9 to move the highlight to the value field which displays either Enable or Disable Use the Scroll Up OY or Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value and then press the Enter key EY to accept the new value and store it within the J2K100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE AD Maretron JM 1259999 20 2211 Advanced Configuration Data Damping Fuel Rate 0 0s Tachometer 0 05 Device Instance Installation Description J1939 Diagnostic Messages ERED Request Engine Hours Disable NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 140 J2K100 J1939 Diagnostic Messages Configuration 6 18 1 5 Request Engine Hours some engines do not transmit their engine hours over the J1939 bus without receiving a request for engine hours from another device on the J1939 network If there is no other device to request the engine hours from these engines then you will not be able to see engine hours on NMEA 2000 displays Setting this parameter to Enable will case the J2K100 to periodically transmit a request for engine hours to the engine allowing the engine hours to be seen on the NMEA 2000 network and connected displays Page 142 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH a SW AD Maretron JAM 1259999 2211 Advanced Configuration Data Dampi
301. s data may be received The available options within the Configuration screen are shown in Figure 11 Power Figure 11 Configuration Screen 5 2 3 1 Device Configuration The ability to calibrate and configure other devices on the bus is a major portion of this manual For this reason it has been given an entire section See section 6 for details 5 2 3 2 Device Selection The Device Selection menu allows you to enable and disable the display of data from individual NMEA 2000 devices In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used in redundant and fail safe configurations A typical Device Selection menu for a network configuration can be seen in Figure 12 below NOTE Now that you can select instances for each displayed parameter you do not need to configure this menu This menu entry is retained for backward compatibility Revision 1 6 2 Page 29 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Selection WA Manufacturer Model SN Status Display AT ITA II TABA On Maretron GPS 100 140001 Online On Maretron SSC AN 112000 Online On Maretron DST 100 1150003 Online On Maretron USE 10 1160004 Online On Maretron 0514200 1100005 Online On klaretron J2H 100 1240008 Online On Maretron WSO 00 1200006 Online On klaretron EMS 100 1220007 Online On Maretron TLA 1 1260000 Online On SSI SSR A Figure 12 Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu disp
302. s entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 31 1 2 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 31 2 Label A device label may be assigned to the VDR100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 31 3 Password Program this parameter with a text password Any connecting N2KExtractor clients must be programmed with the same password in the Connections Settings gt Password field in the N2KExtractor software The default password is blank 6 31 4 DHCP This parameter determines whether or not the VDR100 obtains its LAN connection settings from a DHCP server on the local area network When set to Yes the default value the VDR100 will obtain all necessary connection settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and Default DNS from a DHCP server on the local area network Most routers have the capability to act as a DHCP server Consult the user documentation for your network s router for details lf there is no DHCP server on the local area network or if the VDR100 is connected directly to a PC running N2KExtractor set th
303. s in when power was previously removed 6 7 4 1 5 Switch Control This entry will show the current state of the relay channel either Off open or On closed You may use this menu entry to turn the relay channel on or off Revision 1 6 2 Page 79 DSM250 User s Manual 6 7 4 1 6 Reset Counter This resets the hardware counter associated with this channel to zero 6 7 4 1 7 Reset Timer This resets the hardware timer associated with this channel to zero 6 7 4 2 Channel 1 6 Configuration ALM Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SV 14 Maretron DER 100 1710000 20 1113 Channel 1 Label HELM LIGHTS Operating Mode ALM ALM Instance ei Test Annunciator Scroll Up Figure 65 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen ALM Mode 6 7 4 2 1 Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 7 4 2 2 Operating Mode The operating mode of each channel may be set to either DCR DC Relay in which case the state of the channel is controlled by Circuit Breaker Switch controls in N2KView or Switch Breaker favorite screens in the DSM150 DSM250 displays This section of the manual assumes the operating mode has been set to ALM 6 7 4 2 3 ALM Instance This entry allows you to program the instance number for the ALM function You ma
304. s parameter is 129 User Defined 6 13 4 1 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 4 1 10 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 1 11 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 108 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 13 4 1 12 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 1 13 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 4 2 Channel 0 Configuration Menu Two Independent Sensors Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode h
305. scrolling EY or EY through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key 3 on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up B or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key EY 6 15 1 8 Restore Factory Defaults The DSM250 is capable of restoring all programmable settings on a Maretron GPS100 to the factory default condition You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Restore Factory Defaults menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 123 to be displayed This will cause the GPS100 to set all programmable settings to the factory default condition Page 128 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWT 21 Maretron GPS 100 211 21 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 123 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS100 6 15 2 Cold Start GPS The DSM250 is capable of restarting the GPS algorithm on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Cold start GPS Engine menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 124 to be displayed This will cause t
306. see Section 7 11 on page 222 Line Graph see 7 13 on page 224 SMS Status see Section 7 14 on page 224 Time hh mm see Section 7 15 on page 224 Time hh mm ss see Section 7 16 on page 225 VDR Status see Section 7 17 on page 225 Weather Screen see Section 7 14 on page 224 Wind Rose see Section 7 19 on page 228 Moon Phase see Section 7 20 on page 228 SMS Signal Strength Bar see Section 7 21 on page 228 Trim Tabs Bar Graphs see Section 7 21 on page 228 Swing Meter see Section 7 23 on page 229 Tank Gauge see Section 7 24 on page 230 Watermaker Status see Section 7 25 on page 230 Switch Breaker Display see Section 7 25 on page 231 5 2 6 4 2 Instance Instance is used to specify which product on the network will be used as the source of the displayed information For example there may be two GPS s on the network each of which will have a unique instance assuming the network has been properly configured You use the instance field to tell the DSM250 which GPS to use for displaying data Most of the time the DSM250 simply displays a single parameter from a device on the network so you will only see one Instance entry There are other parameters that the DSM250 displays that are a combination of information from multiple products on the network For example fuel economy is a combination of fuel rate and Speed Over Ground SOG so you will see two Instance entries one to specify the engine s and one to specif
307. seeeesseeeeceaeeeseeeesseeeeeseeessaeeessueesseeeesaeess 235 8 2 Accepting or Cancelling an Alert 236 GE NEE FORNES ENN 236 8 2 2 From NE Alert Status SON WE 236 E WE e elt Lekt E 237 8 3 1 Enable Disable Control 238 0 AIC EE 238 Ooo e 238 A 239 OS Ree die BEE 239 iO OCA AP o PA 239 Dor os 1 PP EER TENE eet eee teen 239 A A 253 A VE E A A A A A A A A A A 254 8 09 10 Remote ANUNCIO Susini 254 8 3 11 SMS Text SENGS Lasser sidder Abee ici dina 255 8 3 12 Operating Mode Moored cccccocccccccncccccncccccnnooocnononononononononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnns 256 8 3 13 Operating Mode Undenway EE SEEN EEES 256 03 14 NENNE 256 E SO 256 GA BELINI NN 25 GO GO EEE EE ES ENEN REA 258 8 6 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode 259 8 7 SMS Tex Phone ee 260 8 8 Advanced Configuration ccccccsecccceeececeeececeeeececeeseeceeseeeeseeeesseeeesseeeesseeesseeeeseeeeeeas 263 0 0 1 FT NN IN 264 02 FMS ENN 264 8 9 Restore Factory Deiauite cc ceccseccsececeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeens 264 MENT 265 Troubleshooting cccceecccescccesceceeeecueeceueeceueeseueecsueecueesueesueeseeeseeeseeessueessueessueesseeessaeessaeeeas 266 Fem Ee Eet e EE 267 Termen SU Ne 272 Installation Template 273 Maretron 2 Year Limited Warramtv 275 Revision 1 6 2 Page Ix DSM250 User s Manual Page x Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Table of Figures Figure 1 Surface Mounting the DSM250 rr
308. speaker may be disabled i e only visual indications are displayed by setting this parameter to Disable The options here are e Enable e Disable 8 8 2 Flashing Screen As an extra means to gain the operator s attention to an Active Alert the DSM250 may be set up to flash the entire screen between Red for Alarms or Yellow for Warnings and Black The flashing may be disabled by setting this option to Disable The options here are e Enable e Disable 8 9 Restore Factory Defaults The Alert parameters of the DSM250 may be restored to the factory defaults by pressing the Enter button while this item is highlighted The operator will be prompted to confirm this action before it taken Alert Setup Add New Alert Are you sure you want to restore factory defaults Power Cancel Figure 314 Restore Factory Defaults Confirmation Page 264 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 9 Maintenance Regular maintenance is important to ensure continued proper operation of the Maretron DSM250 Perform the following tasks periodically e Clean the unit with a soft cloth Do not use chemical cleaners as they may remove paint or markings or may corrode the DSM250 enclosure or seals Do not use any cleaners containing acetone as they will deteriorate the plastic enclosure e Ensure that the unit is mounted securely and cannot be moved relative to the mounting surface If the unit is loose tighten the mounting screws e Check the securi
309. speed over ground Status displays the current operating mode and status of the specified GPS receiver 4 2 14 Heading Magnetic True displays the current heading of the vessel the direction the vessel is pointing relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see section 5 2 7 1 Rate of Turn displays the angular rate of rotation of the vessel about the vertical axis Variation displays the magnetic variation used to convert between true and magnetic headings 4 2 15 Humidity Inside displays the relative humidity from an indoor humidity sensor Outside displays the relative humidity from an outdoor humidity sensor User Defined 129 User Defined 144 displays the relative humidity from humidity sensors of user defined types 4 2 16 Indicator Status displays the on off status of an indicator Hardware OFF Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the OFF state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ON Counter displays the value of a hardware counter in Maretron s DCR100 SIM100 and RIM100 that count the number of the times the indicator has transitioned to the ON state This counter may be reset with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Hardware ERR
310. splay appears in Figure 270 below Trim Tabs 47 0 TA 100 0 RR Port Starboard Figure 270 Trim Tab Display 7 23Swing Meter Display The DSM250 supports a swing meter display similar to those found on dedicated swing meters for displaying the rate of turn of the vessel in degrees per minute The swing meter is available in ranges of 30 Yminute 100 minute or 300 minute A screenshot of the swing meter display appears in Figure 271 below Revision 1 6 2 Page 229 DSM250 User s Manual Rate of Turn STBD Degrees Minute Figure 271 Swing Meter Display 7 24Tank Gauge Display The DSM250 supports a tank level gauge display type which shows percentage of fluid remaining in a tank on an analog gauge with 180 of travel A screenshot of a tank gauge display showing a fuel tank s level appears in Figure 272 below Tank Fuel Level Figure 272 Tank Gauge Display 7 25Watermaker Status The DSM250 supports a watermaker status display type which shows the operating status of a Sea Recovery watermaker connected on the network A screenshot of a watermaker status display showing a fuel tank s level appears in Figure 273 below Page 230 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Watermaker 0 Pre Filter OK Post Filter OK Figure 273 Watermaker Status Display 7 26Switch Breaker Display The DSM250 is capable of controlling loads controlled by a Maretron DCR100 DC Relay a Carling
311. splays total energy consumed by the utility for the Maretron ACM100 this parameter s value may be reset to zero with the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Phase A Current displays phase A current of the Utility Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Utility Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase A Real Power displays real power output on phase A of the Utility Phase A Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase of the Utility Phase A Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase A of the Utility Phase A Power Factor displays power factor of phase A of the Utility Phase B Current displays phase B current of the Utility Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase B of the utility Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase B Real Power displays real power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Power Factor displays power factor of phase B of the Utility Phase
312. ss the Power key The load referenced by the switch breaker will be commanded to change state and the changed state will be reflected in the switch breaker 4 To change other loads repeat the process 5 To stop controlling loads press the Lights key to return to normal operating mode The highlight will disappear Revision 1 6 2 Page 233 DSM250 User s Manual HELM LIGHTS NAV LIGHTS VHF RADIO Figure 277 Favorite Screen Showing Highlighted Switch Breaker Page 234 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 8 Alerts The DSM250 can act as both an Alert Source and an Alert Monitor An Alert Source monitors parameters received on the NMEA20009 bus against a user entered threshold and displays alerts when parameters go out of range It will also transmit this Alert information to other Alert Monitors on the bus Platinum copies of N2KView or other DSM250s and sound the ALM100 annunciators as required Operators may accept or cancel the Alerts from the buttons on the front of the DSM250 An Alert Monitor the DSM250 monitors the bus for Alert messages from Alert Sources and displays the remote Alert information on the DSM250 s screen Operators may accept or cancel the remote Alerts from the buttons on the front of the DSM250 in which case an Alert Command Message is sent back to the Alert Source 8 1 Displaying Active Alerts Active Alerts are overlaid on all the favorite screens 10 37 21 Alerts Pen
313. st be changed at each DSM250 or N2K view and those alerts which would be disabled noted by the user The Vessel Operating Mode is set through the Alert Setup Screen Scroll Down to the required Operating Mode entry press Enter and then use the Scroll Up Scroll Down buttons to select the new Mode Press Enter to complete the operation Revision 1 6 2 Page 259 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Setup Add New Alert Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode EGE ey Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 307 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode The options here are e Disable e Moored e Anchored e Underway NOTE The DSM250 will always display global alerts generated by other devices on the network regardless of the Operating Mode selected 8 7 SMS Text Phone Book The display is able to transmit SMS text messages via a Maretron SMS100 SMS Text Module in the event of an alert This menu allows you to program up to eight different phone numbers to which the display will send alert messages Each alert can send a message to up to three of the numbers in the phone book To edit the SMS Text Phone Book scroll to the SMS Text Phone Book entry on the Alert Setup menu as shown in Figure 308 Page 260 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Alert Setup Add New Alert Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode Anchored Alert Source Instance 3 SMS Text Phone
314. submenu contains configuration parameters for Channel 1 This menu looks different depending on whether the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential or Two Independent Sensors 1 1 1 1 Channel 1 Differential Mode This section describes the Channel 1 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential Revision 1 6 2 Page 111 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HU SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 1679099 10 1121 Channel 1 ATTE Return K Factor 1001 Temp Coefficient Diesel 0 083 C Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label STBD FUEL TEMP Figure 100 FFM100 Channel 1 Configuration Screen Differential Mode 6 13 5 1 1 Channel Supply Return If the Operating Mode is set to Differential you may select whether the Channel 1 fuel flow sensor is connected to the supply or the return fuel line 6 13 5 1 2 K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 13 5 1 3 Temp Coefficient Program this entry with the coefficient of expansion of the fluid being monitored in order to properly compensate for thermal expansion of the fluid as it is heated while passing through the engine The default value for this parameter is 0 033 C which corresponds to Diesel fuel This parameter is not available w
315. t Begin gt which will automatically turn off all 6 channels and automatically zero offset calibrate all the current sensors Power Cancel Figure 61 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Screen Press Begin to execute the calibration process or Cancel to return to the previous menu During the calibration process all channels will be turned off When the calibration is complete the following screen will be displayed Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal Status Calibration Completed Figure 62 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Completion Screen Press the Back button to return to the previous menu 6 7 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 6 7 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was Revision 1 6 2 Page 77 DSM250 User s Manual installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 7 1 4 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The DCR100 transmits a variety of the NMEA2000 PGN s which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enab
316. t be required by the IPG100 and may be left blank If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 18Maretron J2K100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron J2K100 firmware version 1 0 13 2 The DSM250 is capable of configuring settings for the J1939 to NMEA 20000 Gateway J2K100 A screenshot of the J2K100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 138 below Page 140 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHE HWE SW AS Maretron JK 1210008 10 10 11 Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine d Transmission ACIcemaker sai J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JU S None Figure 138 J2K100 Configuration Screen 6 18 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW AD Maretron JM 1259099 20 2211 Advanced Configuration Data Damping Fuel Rate HIE Tachometer 0 05 Device Instance ei Installation Description 41939 Diagnostic Messages Disable Request Engine Hours Disable NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Scroll Up Figure 139 J2K100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 18 1 1 Data Da
317. ta The DSM250 supports up to 16 different favorite screens 4 2 Categories and Data Types The DSM250 is capable of displaying many types of information In order to make it easier to locate a specific type of information to display the different types of information are organized into general categories AC Bus AC Generator AC Utility Anchor Watch DC Depth Electrical Elec Distribution Engine Environment Fluid Flow Fuel Management GPS Heading Humidity Indicator Mechanical Motion Navigation Pressure Vacuum Rudder SMS Text Status Special Device Speed Tank Temperature Time Date Transmission VDR Revision 1 6 2 Page 11 DSM250 User s Manual e Vessel e Wind The following sections explore each category in detail and spell out all of the data types that are available for display if the appropriate sensors are installed in the network 4 2 1 AC Bus Average Frequency displays average frequency of the AC power on the bus Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the bus Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the bus Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Bus Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC pow
318. tallation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See Section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 6 2 Page 149 DSM250 User s Manual 6 20 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The RAA100 Rudder Angle Adapter transmits the NMEA2000 PGN 127245 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 151 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 60 klaretron RAA 10 29999 10 145 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 17145 Rudder Figure 151 RAA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Rudder message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 20 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to t
319. ter If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 31 8 Default DNS This is the IP address of a computer on the Internet that can identify and locate computer systems and resources on the internet In most cases this should not be required by the VDR100 and may be left blank If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 32Maretron WSO100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of performing configuration of the WS0100 Wind Weather Sensor This describes the configuration of the Maretron WSO100 firmware version 2 0 13 Figure 232 below shows a screenshot of the WS0100 configuration menu Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model SH HW Swe 8A Maretron WSO 1200421 20 20 722 Advanced Configuration Jevice Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 82 F Power Figure 232 WSO100 Configuration Screen 6 32 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Page 204 Revision 1 6 2 Mare
320. tering a Textual Value When entering a text string the following menu will be presented Page 8 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron ext Anchor Winch_ Uppercase A Lowercase a Numeric D sign space gt Back lt Exit without saving save amp Exit Figure 8 Entering a Textual Value The top line contains the textual string that has already been entered New characters are appended one at a time to the end of the line at the position marked by the underscore To append an uppercase character use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Uppercase and then press Enter to go across to the characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another uppercase character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a lowercase character use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Lowercase and then press Enter to go across to the characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another lowercase character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a numeral use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Numeric and then press Enter to go across to the
321. the control mode of the display see Section 5 2 7 14 for details Phase A Current displays phase A current of the Generator Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Generator Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase A Real Power displays real power output on phase A of the generator Phase A Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase of the Generator Phase A Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase A of the Generator Phase A Power Factor displays power factor of phase A of the Generator Phase B Current displays phase B current of the Generator Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase B of the Generator Page 12 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase B Real Power displays real power output on phase B of the generator Phase B Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase B of the Generator Phase B Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase B of the Generator Phase B Power Factor displays power factor of phase B of the Generator Phase C Current displays phase C current of the Generat
322. this label will describe the location of the TLM100 and a description of the contents of the tank 6 26 3 Tank Capacity In order for the TLM100 to produce readings of the amount of fluid remaining in the tank the tank capacity must be programmed into the TLM100 adapter Figure 213 below shows a screen shot of the tank capacity being configured To program the tank capacity use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down Page 190 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Tank Capacity menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical tank capacity value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the desired tank capacity value and finally press the Accept key to confirm your selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 3 Maretron TLM 1 Fale Ti 10 114 Advanced Configuration Label Port Mid Tank Capacity CAR SEEE Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number El Tank Type Fuel Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 213 Configuring the Tank Capacity After you have pressed the Accept key a confirmation screen will appear that warns you that the fluid remaining measurement will change as a result of this change Press the Accept key to accept the change and store the new tank capacity value within the TLM100 or Press the Cancel Key to cancel the change and leave the old tank capacity programmed into the TLM100
323. tinguished from one another The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason IS not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the remote DSM150 DSM250 On or that the remote DSM150 DSM250 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up B and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The remote DSM150 DSM250 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting 6 9 2 Copy alarms settings from local display It is possible to copy the alarm settings from a DSM250 unit to a remotely located DSM150 DSM250 This should be done with care because if more than one Alert Source is monitoring the same parameter then multiple alerts will be generated when the parameter goes out of bounds and each one will need to be independently accepted or cancelled Any alarms existing on the remote DSM150 D
324. tinue Power Figure 42 EP 30 Calibration Success Message Page 58 Revision 1 6 2 6 3 Maretron ACM100 Configuration Maretron This describes the configuration of the Maretron ACM100 firmware version 1 0 8 2 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SW B1 Maretron ACM 00 1220904 10 10 6b2 Advanced Configuration AC Circuit Type 3 Phase Y Ph A B C AC Device Type Utility Device Instance 1 Label SHORE POWER Reset Total Energy Recorded Figure 43 ACM100 Configuration Screen 6 3 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW B2 Maretron ACH 10 1591 10 10 7 Advanced Configuration EEE 1004 Current Transformer B 100A Current Transformer 100A Current Transformer A Inverse Install Current Transformer B Inverse Install Current Transformer Normal Install Damping Period Power Damping Period VIF Figure 44 ACM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 3 1 1 Current Transformer A The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor
325. tions to the 00 Inactive state after Clear Gi Delay seconds 5 pe SR Low Alert S et Point transitions to the A pe Active state after Input Signal rises Set Delay seconds al Low Alert Clear Point a Set Delay Input Signal falls below Low Alert Operator Accepts Set Point Alert Time Figure 286 Low Alert Parameters A low alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has dropped below the Low Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal drops below the Low Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts As an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seconds will eliminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the Low Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals rises above the Low Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed lf the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately becomes inactive once the input Signal falls below the Low Alert Clear Point The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or Spurious alerts e The user accepts the alert as shown in the example above 8 3 7 2 2 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Trigger Type mLow Alert Re trigger Period 0 00 min sec Alert Set Point Gal hr Alert Set Delay
326. total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 NOTE If the operating mode is set to Differential Flow Rate then this parameter is unavailable for Channel 0 6 13 4 2 3 Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 13 4 2 4 K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 13 4 2 5 Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 13 4 2 6 Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to reset the total volume recorded to zero 6 13 4 2 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 13 4 2 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this
327. transducer depth offset temperature calibration and speed calibration Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SW 23 Maretron DET 110 i D255 511003 10 Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 6 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 84 DST110 Configuration Screen 6 11 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 23 Maretron DET 110 D255 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance Instance Temperature 3 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 85 DST110 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 11 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 94 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 11 1 2 Instance Temperature The Data Instance of the Temperature as sent in PGNs 130310 130311 and 130312 is set in this field Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct instance number and the press the Enter
328. tron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWT 8A Maretron WSO 1200421 20 Advanced Configuration METAN TIER 1 instance Humidity ei Instance Pressure ei instance Temperature 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Figure 233 WSO100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 32 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Device instance is always used in the Wind PGNs 6 32 1 2 Instance Humidity This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the humidity transmitted in PGN 130313 You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple humidity sensors on the network 6 32 1 3 Instance Pressure This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the air pressure transmitted in PGN 130314 You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple pressure sensors on the network 6 32 1 4 Instance Temperature This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the temperature transmitted in PGN 130312 You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple temperature sensors on the network Note that the TMP100 modul
329. tron DSM250 09 Onl On d Maepon GES mt Gw On Power Figure 229 USB100 Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the USB100 On or that the USB100 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up B and Scroll Down EY keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you Revision 1 6 2 Page 201 DSM250 User s Manual are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The USB100 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus the
330. turn to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be in its error condition for at least the set delay time before the alert will become active An interesting use of the set delay when monitoring a bilge pump for example is to set the Set Delay to a large value say 20 minutes Now if the bilge pump runs for more than 20 minutes at a time the alert will be triggered Alert Clear Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be not in its error condition for at least the clear delay time before the alert will become cleared 8 3 7 5 Trigger Type is Off Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals 1 e many different possible input values there are also switch alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as Off causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as On then the alert becomes inactive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the sw
331. ty of the cable connected to the NMEA 2000 interface and tighten if necessary Revision 1 6 2 Page 265 DSM250 User s Manual 10 Troubleshooting If you notice unexpected operation of the Maretron DSM250 follow the troubleshooting procedures in this section to remedy simple problems Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure No activity on the display Check the connection to the NMEA 2000 and connector and tighten if necessary Ensure that power is supplied to the connected NMEA 2000 cable Expected data appears as a dash Use the N2KAnalyzer tool to verify whether the instead of a value device providing the data to the network is in transmitting a valid data value Data fluctuates between two different Two devices on the network are transmitting the values same data Check the Instance Numbers on all devices transmitting that data If these steps do not solve your problem please contact Maretron Technical Support refer to Section 12 for contact information Warning There are no user serviceable components inside the Maretron DSM250 Opening the DSM250 will expose the sensitive electronic components to adverse environmental conditions that may render the unit inoperative Please do not open the DSM250 as this will automatically void the warranty If service IS required please return the unit to an authorized Maretron service location Page 266 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 11 Technical Specifications Specifications
332. ud Services This entry allows you to enable the IPG100 to use Maretron Cloud Services Maretron Cloud Services allows you to easily connect to the IPG100 from any N2KView client whether it is a Windows PC or an OS or Android smartphone or tablet If you have an active Maretron Cloud Services account you must change this setting to Enable so that the IPG100 will connect to Maretron Cloud Services If you do not use Maretron Cloud Services change this setting to Disable 6 17 5 DHCP This parameter determines whether or not the IPG100 obtains its LAN connection settings from a DHCP server on the local area network When set to Yes the default value the IPG100 will obtain all necessary connection settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and Default DNS from a DHCP server on the local area network Most routers have the capability to act as a DHCP server Consult the user documentation for your network s router for details If there is no DHCP server on the local area network or if the IPG100 is connected directly to a DSM800 or directly to an MBB100 set the DHCP parameter to No and manually configure the IP Address section 6 17 6 Subnet Mask section 6 17 7 Default Gateway section 6 17 8 Default DNS section 6 17 9 Revision 1 6 2 Page 139 DSM250 User s Manual 6 17 6 IP Address This parameter is the IP Internet Protocol address used by the IPG100 You will need to specify this ad
333. ular favorite screen is enabled This parameter has four possible settings Off this favorite screen is disabled and is not displayed Auto this favorite screen is displayed only in Auto mode Manual this favorite screen is displayed only in Manual mode Auto Manual this favorite screen is displayed in both Auto and Manual modes 5 2 6 2 Format The DSM250 offers many methods and formats of displaying multiple data items at a given time This parameter is used to program how many data items will appear on this particular favorite screen and in what sizes these items will appear A graphical preview of the selected format will appear in the upper right hand corner of the display This parameter has the following settings Full Window one parameter will be displayed taking up the entire screen 2 3 Top 1 3 Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top 2 3 of the screen and the second occupying the bottom 1 3 of the screen 1 3 Top 2 3 Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top 1 3 of the screen and the second occupying the bottom 2 3 of the screen Half Left Qtr Qtr three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the left half of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen Qtr Half Qtr three parameters will be displayed the first occupying t
334. unt of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point The Alert will be triggered when the qaulity of the GPS fix as reported by the GPS drops lower than the value specified in this field Possible Values are e 3D DGPS best quality e 3D GPS e 2D GPS e 1D GPS e No fix Alert Set Delay When the quality of the GPS fix becomes lower than the quality specified in the Alert Set Point field for longer than the time specified in the Alert Set Delay field the alert will become active Alert Clear Point The Alert will be cleared when the quality of the GPS fix as reported by the GPS becomes better than the value specified in this field Possible values are the same as the Alert Set Point Alert Clear Delay If the alert is active and the quality of the GPS fix becomes higher than the quality specified in the Alert Clear Point field for longer than the time specified in the Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 11 Trigger Type is Direction Alert A Direction Alert is used to indicate that a heading or wind direction has changed from the reference direction more than a programmable amount For example once a heading has been established an alert can be generated if the heading changes more than a specified amount Direction Alerts may also be set for wind
335. urse Up where the needle is always pointing straight up and the compass rose rotates to indicate the heading pointed to by the needle Figure 246 and 2 North Up where the rose always has North straight up and the needle rotates pointing in the direction of the heading bearing or course parameter Figure 247 Figure 246 Compass Rose Display Course Up Example Revision 1 6 2 Page 213 DSM250 User s Manual Figure 247 Compass Rose North Up Display Page 214 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 7 4 Date The date display shows a date The format of the date shown can be set using the Units menu please refer to 5 2 7 13 for details on how to set the date format A full screen of a date display can be seen in Figure 248 below Local Date 0 10 05 2015 Figure 248 Date Display Example 7 5 Date Time The Date Time display shows a date and time on a single display The format of the date shown can be set using the Units menu please refer to 5 2 7 13 for details on how to set the date format The format of the time shown can be set using the Units menu please refer to Section 5 2 7 11 for details on how to set the time format A full screen example of a Date Time display can be seen in Figure 249 below UTC Date 0 10 05 2015 23 54 23 Figure 249 Date Time Display Example Revision 1 6 2 Page 215 DSM250 User s Manual 7 6 Gauge Display The gauge display
336. used to configure and calibrate the Tank Level Monitor TLM100 TLM150 TLM200 This describes the configuration of firmware version 1 1 6 After selecting the TLM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration N Manufacturer Model Sg HUT SW 13 Haretron TLM 1 209711 10 114 Advanced Configuration ET TINA Port Mid Tank Capacity 81 4 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number 2 Tank Type Fuel Figure 210 TLM100 Configuration Screen 6 26 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 3 Maretron TLM 10 200711 10 114 Advanced Configuration Device Instance D Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 211 TLM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 26 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 6 2 Page 189 DSM250 User s Manual 6 26 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installatio
337. uture undefined tank types Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 73 Maretron TLA 100 209761 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Gol Operating Mode NMEA2000 Figure 206 Configuring the Tank Type 6 25 7 Operating Mode The TLA100 can be operated in one of two operating modes depending on the installation e NMEA 2000 the only thing that is connected to the resistive sender is the TLA100 e NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge in addition to the TLA100 the resistive sender is also connected to a dual coil analog gauge It is important that this setting be performed correctly in order for the TLA100 to produce correct level measurements A screenshot showing configuration of the operating mode appears in Figure 207 below To configure the operating mode use the Scroll Up P or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Operating Mode menu item then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the operating mode value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down B keys to change the operating mode to the desired value and finally press the Entry key to confirm your selection and store the operating mode within the TLA100 Page 186 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HUT SW 73 Maretron TLA WO 209761
338. vation PDOP and SNR masks set the antenna altitude force a cold start enable disable individual PGN transmission and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS200 enable and disable WAAS functionality force a cold start enable disable individual PGN transmission and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron Internet Protocol Gateway IPG100 set IP connection parameters set N2KServer password view N2KServer information and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron J1939 to NMEA 2000 Gateway J2K100 set J1939 node address set NMEA 20009 engine transmission instance enable pass through of J1939 diagnostic messages and enable disable individual NMEA 20009 PGN transmissions Maretron Network Bus Extender NBE100 set device label Maretron Rudder Angle Adapter RAA100 set rudder number operating mode and calibrate rudder position Revision 1 6 2 Page 49 DSM250 User s Manual Maretron Run Indicator Monitor RIM100 set data instance for the device and labels for the device and each channel Maretron Switch Indicator Monitor SIM100 set data instance for the device and labels for the device and each channel Set each channel mode Maretron SMS Text Module SMS100 set device instance and installation description for the device verify cellular network connectivity and perform send receive tests Maretron Solid Sate Compass SSC20
339. vels Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Scroll Scroll Ur Power Bach Down Enter Figure 197 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Adapter The first step in custom calibration of the tank level sender is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank capacity use the arrow keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then oress the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Back Key 39 will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Revision 1 6 2 Page 181 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration 1 Use arrow keys to select estimated tank capacity 100 Gal 12 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Figure 198 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation The next step in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration
340. while it is highlighted e Instance the instance number of the switch bank containing the switch breaker to be controlled e Channel the channel number of the switch breaker to be controlled e Title Sets the text string to be displayed on the switch breaker Please refer to Section 5 2 6 4 4 for details e Font Size Sets the size of the font used to display the label on the switch breaker You may select Small Medium or Large default e Restore Factory Defaults This restores the switch breaker to factory default settings In order to control a switch breaker using the DSM250 create a screen with a switch breaker which has been configured to refer to the switch bank instance and indicator number of the switch breaker you want to control In normal operating mode use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change to the screen containing the switch breaker Once that screen is displayed follow these steps to change a load s state 1 Press the Enter key for approximately one second This will place the display into Control mode and one of the switches breakers on the screen will be highlighted with a thick border as shown in Figure 277 below 2 If there is more than one switch breaker on the screen you may use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the highlight to a different switch breaker 3 Once the switch breaker for the load you want to control is selected then pre
341. y the GPS for SOG 5 2 6 4 3 Alert In setting up the Anchor Watch display type this field is used to specify the associated Anchor Watch Alert priority The list from which the selection is made will be limited to the list of Anchor Watch Alerts already created in the system 5 2 6 4 4 Title Each display type has auser defined title that is displayed above the control The contents of the title are specified in this field There are three options Page 42 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron e Default the title of the control is the same as the name of the parameter being displayed e Label the label of the parameter The label is programmed into the remote device and will be transferred to the title when it is received from the remote device This means that if the label of the remote device is changed the title of the control will be automatically updated to match the new label e Custom the title is entered by the user using the method described in section 3 3 4 5 2 7 Units Menu The Units Menu allows you to set the desired display units for the DSM250 The following sections provide more detail on the individual unit settings Units WESER Magnetic Jepth Feet Distance Nautical Miles Boat Speed Knots Wind Speed Knots Wind True Vessel Ref Ground Temperature F Atmospheric Pressure Inches Mercury Fluid Pressure Pounds Square Inch Volume Gallons Time Format 24 Hour Local Time Offset 0 00 Power
342. y be some circumstances where configuration is desirable The following sections describe the different configuration modes including the Restore Factory Defaults configuration which allows you to return the GPS200 to the factory settings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW di Maretron DS A T 1 45 10 34 Cold start GPS Engine Label SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Figure 127 GPS200 Configuration Screen 6 16 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea The Advanced Configuration Screen is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW di Maretron DS 200 T 1 45 10 34 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 128 GPS200 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 16 1 1 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the GPS200 device on the network Unless there are multiple GPSs on the network this should be left at zero Page 132 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 16 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here
343. y of information for up to 64 DC sources including alternators batteries solar cells wind generators etc with special parameters for batteries i e State of Charge Time Remaining etc Current displays electrical current being sourced to from the battery Voltage displays voltage measured at the battery Battery Temperature displays battery case temperature Battery State of Charge displays estimated state of charge of the battery please consult the battery monitor s documentation for details Battery Time Remaining displays estimated time remaining for the battery given its current temperature and rate of discharge please consult the battery monitor e documentation for details Ripple Voltage displays magnitude of the AC component riding on top of the DC voltage Power displays the power produced or consumed by the battery 4 2 6 Depth Transducer Offset when negative it displays distance from the depth transducer to the bottom of the keel when positive it displays distance between the depth transducer and the waterline Water Depth displays the current water depth including the transducer offset If the transducer offset is programmed to a negative number then the water depth represents the depth below the keel If the transducer offset is positive then the water depth represents water line depth Water Below Transducer displays the distance from the depth transducer to the sea or lake bottom t
344. y use a value between 0 and 15 This instance number is used by the DSM150 DS250 or N2KView when selecting annunciators to sound when programming an alert 6 7 4 2 4 Test Annunciator Select this entry to verify functionality of the channel in ALM mode This will cause the annunciator to sound or light briefly Page 80 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 6 8 Maretron DSM200 Configuration You can use the DSM250 to configure other remotely located DSM200 units by using the Remote DSM200 configuration menu shown in Figure 66 below This describes the configuration of the Maretron DSM200 firmware version 1 10 There is one configurable item for the remote DSM200 configuration and that is Remote Device Selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW D Maretron DSM AN 1700005 12 LN Remote Device Selection Figure 66 DSM200 Remote Configuration Screen 6 8 1 Remote Device Selection A DSM250 unit can be used to configure a remote DSM200 to set which NMEA 2000 devices are selected for display on the remote DSM200 unit In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration For example a certain compass unit out of several may be selected for display on the remote DSM200 The Remote Device Selection menu for an example network configuration can be seen in Figure 67 below WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for
345. y will assume their prior Display setting 6 31 Maretron VDR100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of performing configuration of the VDR100 Vessel Data Recorder This describes the configuration of the Maretron VDR100 firmware version 2 0 0 4 Figure 230 below shows a screenshot of the VDR100 configuration menu Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW 29 Maretron VDR CU 1170901 10 110 Label Vessel Data Recorder Password DHCP Yes IP Address 10 0 0 202 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 0 0 1 Default DNS 10 0 0 31 Figure 230 VDR100 Configuration Screen 6 31 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWE SW 29 Maretron VDR 10 1179901 10 110 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 2 Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Figure 231 VDR100 Advanced Configuration Screen Page 202 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 1 1 2 4 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 31 1 1 Installation Description Thi
346. ys to change to the screen containing the Anchor Watch display Once that screen is displayed follow these steps to set the Anchor Drop position 1 Press the Enter key for approximately one second This will place the display into Control mode and one of the controllable items on the screen will be highlighted with a thick border 2 If there is more than one controllable item on the screen you may use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the highlight to the Anchor Watch display 3 Once the Anchor Watch display is selected then press the Power key You will then see a confirmation popup asking whether it is okay to set the Anchor Drop position to the current position If you answer Yes then the Anchor Drop position will be set to the current GPS position Page 212 Revision 1 6 2 Maretron 4 To exit the control mode press the Lights key to return to normal operating mode The highlight will disappear 7 2 Bar Graph The bar graph display shows a parameter on a vertical bar graph with ten segments The numeric value of the parameter is shown above the bar graph A full screen example of a bar graph display can be seen in Figure 245 below Tank Fuel Level Percent Figure 245 Bar Graph Display Example 7 3 Compass Rose Display The compass rose display shows a heading bearing or course parameter on a compass rose display There are two types of compass roses 1 Co

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PDF形式、44Kbyte  Motion Computing Wireless Mobile Keyboard Installation Manual    Règles de certification NF 089 version Française 08-2009  LOW PRESSURE SEWAGE & EFFLUENT SYSTEMS  パ・ " 割っ張ります。 ご~_ "  Polaroid m536 User's Manual  Version micrologiciel : 4.0x FR SÉCURITÉ ET MODE D`EMPLOI  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file